JP6519160B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, start the establishment of the dynamic conditions on the basis of conducted lottery, when the predetermined result is selected by the lottery is stopped by a combination of the plurality of symbols are variably displayed with predetermined, game to generate the special game state after stopping is often performed. In such a gaming machine, it is informed by Table Shimesuru the display screen expectations as a hit.

JP, 2011-072569, A

  However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, and a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. The lottery means for performing a lottery based on the information stored in the storage means, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information to be dynamically displayed on the display means Dynamic display means, prior lottery means capable of performing a prior lottery on the information stored in the storage means before the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and the identification information is specified And a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when displayed as identification information indicating a lottery result, wherein the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Display period Dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period within the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, by the expectation degree indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result Notice display control means for displaying at least the plurality of expected degree notice display modes in which the variable is set variably and the overall expected degree notice display mode indicating the overall expected degree in the plurality of expected notice display modes And the advance notice display control means determines, among the information stored in the storage means, information determined that the result of the prior lottery is the result corresponding to the specific lottery result. When the information is stored, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery unit executed based on the information stored in the storage unit before the information In the meanwhile, the total expectation degree advance notice display mode is variably displayed only in the direction in which the overall expectation degree becomes high, and in the information stored in the storage means, the result of the prior lottery is the result. When the information determined to be the result corresponding to the specific lottery result is not stored, the comprehensive expectation degree advance notice display based on the general expectation degree indicated by the general expectation degree advance notice display mode The aspect is configured to be variably displayed in the aspect in which the overall expectation is high or the aspect in which the overall expectation is low .

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein said display means is a shall consist of a liquid crystal display.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of the acquiring condition, the memory means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquiring means, and the memory means Lottery means for performing a lottery based on the selected information, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means Prior lottery means capable of performing a prior lottery on the information stored in the storage means before the lottery means is executed, and the identification information indicates a specific lottery result When it is displayed as information, it has the bonus game execution expedient which executes the bonus game which becomes advantageous to the player, decides the dynamic indicatory period of the aforementioned identification information which is indicated dynamically with the aforementioned dynamic indicatory expedient Dynamic display period Within the dynamic display period determined by the determination means and the dynamic display period determination means, the effect mode is variably set according to the expectation degree indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result Control means for displaying at least the plurality of expected degree notice display modes and the overall expected degree notice display mode indicating the overall expected degree in the plurality of expected notice display modes on the display means. The preliminary announcement display control means stores information in which it is determined that the result of the prior lottery corresponds to the specific lottery result in the information stored in the storage means. In the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means executed based on the information stored in the storage means prior to the information. The waiting notice display mode is variably displayed only in the direction in which the overall expectation increases, and in the information stored in the storage means, the result of the prior lottery corresponds to the specific lottery result In the case where the information determined to be the result is not stored, the comprehensive expectation degree advance notice display mode is comprehensively expected based on the comprehensive expectation degree indicated by the general expectation degree advance notice mode. It is configured to be able to be displayed variably in the aspect in which the degree is high or the aspect in which the degree is low.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, since the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display, there is an effect that various displays can be performed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation | movement unit which looked at the operation | movement unit which decomposed | disassembled the front. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation | movement unit which looked at the operation | movement unit which decomposed | disassembled the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, the 1st gear group, and the 2nd gear group. It is a back exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, the 1st gear group, and the 2nd gear group. It is a front perspective view of a meniscal member. It is a rear perspective view of a meniscal member. It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a fragmentary sectional view of a compound operation unit in the XVIIa-XVIIa line of Drawing 16, and (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of a compound operation unit after moving a drive from (a). It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a fragmentary sectional view of the compound motion unit in the XIXa-XIXa line of FIG. 18, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the compound motion unit after separating the drive motor from the drive gear from (a) It is. (A) is a front view of a double layer gear, (b) is a rear view of a double layer gear. (A) is a rear view of a compound operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a double layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) is a rear view of a compound operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a double layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a double layer gear and a reversing gear. (A) is a rear view of a compound operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a double layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) is a rear view of a compound operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a double layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a pair of slide member in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of a pair of slide member. (A) is a front view of the double-layer gear in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of a double-layer gear, (c) is a side view of a double-layer gear. (A) is a front view of a reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a side view of the reversing gear. (A) is a front view of the double-layer gear in a 4th embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of a double-layer gear, (c) is two in the XXXIc-XXXIc line of FIG.31 (b). It is sectional drawing of a layer gear. (A) is a front view of the reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a partial side view of the reversing gear in the direction of the arrow XXXIIc of FIG. . It is a front view of the two-layer gear in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. It is a front disassembled perspective view of the two-layer gear in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of a double layer gear and a reversing gear. (A) to (c) is a rear view of the double-layer gear in a 7th embodiment. (A) to (e) are rear views of a double layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) to (e) are rear views of a double layer gear and a reverse gear. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a graph which shows the speed change of a two-layer gear. (A) And (b) is a rear view of the double layer gear in 8th Embodiment. (A) to (e) are rear views of a double layer gear and a reverse gear. It is a graph which shows the rotational speed of a two-layer gear. (A) is a front perspective view of the specific winning opening 650, (b) is a rear perspective view of the specific winning opening 650. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the specific winning a prize mouth 650 which was disassembled. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the specific winning a prize mouth 650 which was disassembled. (A) is the front view which removed the front cover of specific winning a prize apparatus 650, (b) is a sectional view in the LIIb-LIIb line of Drawing 52 (a), (c) is Drawing 52 (a). And LIIc-LIIc line of FIG. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen in the 1st control example, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen in the 1st control example. is there. It is the model which showed the ball entering timing typically in opening-and-closing operation of a ball entering regulation board. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the ball entering timing in the opening and closing pattern A of the ball entering regulating plate, and (b) schematically showing the ball entering timing in the opening and closing pattern B of the ball entry restricting plate It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the detection display based on the detection timing of various sensors, and its detection result. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an appearance effect by the normal effect screen in the big hit game in the first control example, and (b) is an appearance by the special effect screen in the big hit game in the first control example It is the figure which showed the production and the escape production typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically capture production and escape production by the special production screen in the big hit game in the 1st control example, and (b) is the special production in the big hit game in the 1st control example It is a figure showing typically appearance appearance and recapture production by a screen. (A) is a figure which showed typically appearance production and failure production by the special effect screen in the big hit game in the 1st control example, and (b) is a normal production in the big hit game in the 1st control example It is the model which showed the capture production by a screen typically. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the spherical character and display content in a character interlocking production. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the spherical character and display content in a character interlocking production. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the display content in background interlocking production. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the display content in background interlocking production. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st random number counter C1 and the big hit judgment value of a special symbol in the 1st control example, and (b) is the 1st in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of hit classification counter C2 and the classification of big hit, and (c) is the correspondence of the 2nd hit random number counter C4 in the 1st embodiment, and the judgment value of the hit of a regular symbol It is the model which showed the relationship typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of jackpot in the first control example FIG. 6C is a schematic view schematically showing the relationship, and FIG. 6C is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (normal) in the first control example, (D) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (probability) in the first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the accessory interlocking effect table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the background lottery table in the first control example FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a work RAM in the display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining the image at the time of the power activation in the example of the 1st control. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in a 1st control example, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B in a 1st control example. FIG. 6 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example. It is the model which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the background change extraction process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning a prize command processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot winning process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indicator setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot inside production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st example of control. (A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit display processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the ball entering presentation processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the appearance production processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the escape production processing performed by MPU in the display control in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the failure production processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the capture production processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the recapture production processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the timing alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing back surface change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flowchart showing an error command process. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production command processing which is run by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer renewal processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically SW production | presentation of comment type | system | group production in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically SW production | presentation of the continuous hitting type | system | group production in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically SW production | presentation of the touch system presentation in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the comment background table for hit normal reach in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the comment background table for hit super reach in the second control example It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the out-of-time comment background table in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the out-of-time fixed comment background table in the second control example It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the hit fixed comment background table in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the comment table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the continuous hitting system effect lottery table in the second control example It is. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the SW production selection processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production command processing which is run by MPU inside the display control in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the production | presentation screen of the continuous hitting type | system | group production in the 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the production | presentation screen of the continuous hitting type | system | group production in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) shows the contents of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device in the third control example It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first lottery table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the second lottery table in the third control example It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the 3rd lottery table in the 3rd control example, and (d) shows typically the contents of the 4th lottery table in the 3rd control example. (E) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fifth lottery table in the third control example, and (f) is a schematic view of the sixth lottery table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first remaining time lottery table in the third control example, and (b) shows the contents of the second remaining time lottery table in the third control example It is a schematic diagram shown typically, (c) is a schematic diagram showing typically the contents of the lottery table for the 3rd remaining time in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing 3 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the SW depression adaptation processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the SW production | presentation selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the SW production selection processing 3 which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the ball entering timing in the opening and closing pattern at the time of jackpot C in the fourth control example, (b) is in the opening and closing pattern at the time of small hitting in the fourth control example It is the model which showed the ball entering timing typically. It is the flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the main control in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed jackpot command processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process between rounds performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, showing a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (movable member 310). (Not shown), rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), through gate 67 The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types to be determined here, 16R probability variation jackpots and 16R hour short jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "16R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after 16 round jackpots, and "15R hour junior college winning" is a maximum round number of 16 round jackpots Later, while transitioning to the low probability state, for a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes) is a jackpot that becomes a short time state.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  As a result, during normal operation, there are many cases where the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so to the first prize opening 64 without the electric winning combination. Aim the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-hand"), and winning the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery, It is advantageous for the player to aim to become a player.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the motor gate is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a big hit by the winning of the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  It should be noted that the selection ratio of the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot may be different between when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640. . Specifically, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when becoming a jackpot, the case where the ball wins the first winning opening 64 in the case where the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 Set higher than. This makes it possible to make the above-mentioned change due to the hitting of the ball clearer.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is a front view triangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close the lower side of the opening / closing plate to the right. And). The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state where it is easy for the specified winning opening 65a to win, and the open state and the closed state at normal times It works to repeat the state of alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. In addition, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the disposition position is also the lower right side of the first winning a prize opening 64 or the first Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 in a front view, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. The first entering sensor 650a and the second entering sensor 650b, which are disposed in the specific winning unit 650, are connected, and the MPU 201 outputs signals from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 225, the main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, other units 228, the frame button 22, the first function motor 330c, the second function motor 340c, the inlet The sensor 651a, the outlet sensor 652a, the bypass sensor 653a, and the like are connected to one another. Other devices 228 include a drive motor 472.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear surface image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 26. First, the housing structure of each unit 300 and 400 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates the combined operation unit 400 mounted on the back case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, one side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 200, the front unit 300 and the combined operation unit 400 are accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 210, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, compound operation unit 400 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner side surface of outer wall portion 212 of rear case 210, and is surrounded by outer wall portion 212 while abutting on the inner side surface of outer wall portion 212. It is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 in the manner to be described (see FIG. 7). In the combined operation unit 400, in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), a rectangular opening is formed at a position that coincides with the opening 211a of the back case 210 in a front view.

  With respect to the state shown in FIG. 7, front unit 300 is disposed in a stacked state in a stacked manner on the front side of combined operation unit 400, and is accommodated in rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, another operation unit (for example, the front unit 300) is disposed in a stacked state in which the other operation units (for example, the front unit 300) are superimposed on a predetermined operation unit (for example, the combined operation unit 400). In front view, a given operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light transmitting material, and the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13 can be viewed by the player, the predetermined operation unit It is possible to make the player visually recognize only the necessary part of and to shield other parts from the player by other operation units. As a result, it is not necessary to design a predetermined effect member shielded by another operation unit on the premise that the whole is viewed by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, an outline of the operation mode of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. In the description of FIG. 8, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 8 is a front view of the operation unit 200. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 are retracted above and below the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of slide members 420 are slid in the direction facing each other, and the pair of slide members 420 are at the center of the opening 211 a of the back case 210 (that is, the third symbol display device 81 Front, see FIG. 2).

  Each of the operation units 300 and 400 is independently formed to be operable, and as described above, is arranged in a stacked (stacked) state. With regard to those disposed in different layers, even if the operation member is a mode in which the operation member projects inward of the opening 211a of the back case 210, it can be operated at the same time. That is, not only the operation units 300 and 400 can be operated alone, but also these operations can be combined, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 400, the retracted position and the extended position of the pair of slide members 420 are formed as the end of the movable range of the pair of slide members 420.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. FIGS. 9A and 9B are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 400. FIG. In FIG. 9A, the slide member 420 and the crescent member 460 are disposed at the retracted position, and in FIG. 9B, the slide member 420 and the crescent member 460 are disposed at the extended position. . Note that the extended positions of the slide member 420 and the crescent member 460 are formed as the end of the end of the movable range of the slide member 420 located on the opposite side of the above-described retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 is slid in the vertical direction, and in the process of the slide movement, the crescent member 460 is the axial support hole 421 a of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 12) Is rotated around the Next, the overall configuration of combined operation unit 400 will be described.

  10 is an exploded front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 11 is an exploded back perspective view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a pair of slide members 420, a back cover 430, and a first gear group. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of 440 and a second gear group 450, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members 420, a back cover 430, a first gear group 440 and a second gear group 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the compound operation unit 400 is disposed in a pair on the left and right, and a pair of base members 410 fastened and fixed to the rear case 210, and connects the base members 410 and also vertically. A pair of slide members 420 formed slidably in a sliding manner, a back cover 430 that forms a space with the main body portion 421 by being fastened to the back surface of the main body portion 421 of those slide members 420, and slide members A first gear group 440 disposed between 420 and the back cover 430, a second gear group 450 similarly disposed between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430, and an inversion of the second gear group 450 Mainly composed of a crescent member 460 locked to the gear 453 and a drive device 470 generating a driving force for moving the slide member 420 .

  The base member 410 is a member which is formed in a rectangular plate shape which is long in the vertical direction and serves as a skeleton of the combined operation unit 400, and a long plate-shaped main body 411 which makes the thickness direction coincide with the front-rear direction. A plurality of slide holes 412 bored in the thickness direction and extending in the vertical direction, alignment walls 413 formed on opposing surfaces of the pair of base members 410 as wall surfaces parallel to the extending direction of the slide holes 412, and assembled And a fixed rack gear member 414 in which rack gears 414a and 414b are formed on the side opposite to the side in contact with the alignment wall 413 in the state (see FIG. 9).

  The slide holes 412 are long holes that regulate the slide direction of the slide member 420, and are provided in series at the approximate center of each base member 410 and have a pair of intermediate slide holes 412a whose extension directions coincide with each other, and the middle thereof It is formed in the outside slide hole 412b formed in the outside (the opposite side to the side where a pair of base members 410 oppose) of slide hole 412a, and the inside (the opposite side of a pair of base members 410) of middle slide hole 412a. And an inner slide hole 412c. The outer slide holes 412b and the inner slide holes 412c are alternately formed vertically. That is, for example, when the outer slide hole 412 b is formed in the upper portion of the base member 410, the inner slide hole 412 c is formed in the lower portion of the base member 410.

  The fixed rack gear member 414 is fastened to the base member 410 in a state of being in contact with the alignment wall 413 for the purpose of transmitting a driving force to the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450 and has a rod shape having a rectangular cross section. It is a member to be formed, and is a permanent rack gear 414a engraved across the outer surface which is a side surface that is in contact with the alignment wall 413 and the surface opposite to the outer surface formed parallel to the outer surface. And a limited rack gear 414b which is engraved adjacent to the front side (the front side in FIG. 10) of the permanent rack gear 414a and which is engraved only near the central portion of the base member 410.

  The permanent rack gear 414a is engaged with the second gear group 450, and the limited rack gear 414b is engaged with the first gear group 440, which will be described in detail later. In addition, in the limited rack gear 414b, the starting gear teeth 414b1 (end gear teeth) disposed on the side to start meshing with the deformed gear 441 of the first gear group 440 are formed to be larger than other gear teeth. (See Figure 10).

  The slide member 420 is a member in which the meniscal member 460 is disposed at the central portion and which is slid up and down. The slide member 420 is formed by a pair of upper and lower parts, and the configuration of each slide member 420 is common (point symmetry at the center point in front view), so only one (upper) slide member 420 will be described and the other (lower) The description of the slide member 420 is omitted.

  That is, one slide member 420 is formed into a rectangular plate elongated in the left-right direction, and a step is formed on the front side at both ends, and vertically from the both ends of the main portion 421 A pair of extended receiving legs 422, a pair of side walls 423 extending in a plate shape from the upper and lower ends of the main body 421 to the back side (front side in FIG. 11), and a protrusion from the back of the main body 421 A plurality of first shaft support pins 424 are provided and a plurality of members are continuously provided in the left-right direction, and a plurality of second shaft support pins 425 are provided so as to project from the back of one end (right side in FIG. 11) of the main body 421. And mainly.

  The main body 421 has a large diameter shaft support hole 421a drilled in the central portion, a rotation restricting hole 421b drilled in a circular arc coaxial with the shaft support hole 421a, and a side wall portion 423 opposite to the upper end And a slide restricting wall 421c whose center side is one step closer to the side wall 423 and a slide restricting pin 421d which is provided on both ends and protrudes to the back side and which is formed by a pair of upper and lower parts. Ru.

  The shaft support hole 421a is an opening through which the arc-shaped wall portion 461c of the crescent member 460 is inserted, and the diameter of the shaft support hole 421a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the arc-shaped wall portion 461c. The crescent member 460 and the reversing gear 453 are non-rotatably coupled to each other through the shaft support hole 421a.

  The rotation restricting hole 421b is an opening through which the locking pin 461e of the crescent member 460 is inserted, and the width of the rotation restricting hole 421b is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the locking pin 461e. The locking pin 461 e is abutted against the end of the rotation restricting hole 421 b to restrict further rotation of the crescent member 460.

  The slide restricting wall portion 421 c is a portion for accommodating the slide rack 442 of the first gear group 440 between the upper side wall portion 423 of the main body portion 421 and a portion formed in a step is biased to the slide rack 442 Is formed in such a manner as to clamp one end of the biasing spring 442c.

  The slide restricting pin 421d is a cylindrical member which is inserted into the ring-shaped collar member C and inserted into the intermediate slide hole 412a of the base member 410, and the retaining plate B is fastened and fixed at the tip.

  The collar member C (see FIG. 17A) is formed in a ring shape having a flange (large diameter portion). The outer diameter of the flange is larger than the width of each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a, and the outer diameter of the ring portion formed with the flange is each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. It is formed slightly smaller than the width of. Therefore, the flange is interposed between the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 and the main body portion 411 of the base member 410, and the ring portion of the collar member C is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a with a slight gap. Thus, the slide restricting pin 421d is formed so as to be freely movable in the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a, while the movement in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a is restricted.

  The retaining plate B (see FIG. 19A) is formed with a width larger than the width of each slide hole 412a to 412c whose main body portion includes the intermediate slide hole 412a. Therefore, the slide member 420 is non-extractably coupled to the base member 410 in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restricting pin 421d.

  In addition, a fastening hole is formed in the surface of the retaining plate B in contact with the end of the slide restricting pin 421d, and the fastening hole is overlaid in the same shape as the ring portion of the collar member C. The buildup portion is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a. As a result, the collar member C is disposed at the root portion of the slide restricting pin 421d and the buildup portion of the retaining plate B is disposed at the tip end portion. Therefore, the axis of the slide restricting pin 421d is an intermediate slide hole It can support stably, making it correspond to the opening direction of each slide hole 412a-412c containing 412a (refer FIG. 19 (a)).

  The receiving leg 422 is a portion to which the driving force of the driving device 470 is transmitted, and is in the same manner as the rack gear 422a engaged with the driving gear 473 of the driving device 470 and the slide restricting pin 421d of the main body 421. It is formed on a slide restricting pin 422b which is provided in a protruding manner, a front side wall portion 422c which is provided on the side of the front side of the rack gear 422a (in the direction perpendicular to the connecting direction of gear teeth) and a front side wall portion 422c. And a notch portion 422d which is a circular arc-shaped notch.

  Similar to the slide restricting pin 421 d, the slide restricting pin 422 b is provided with the collar member C and the retaining plate B, and is inserted into the slide holes 412 b and 412 c of the base member 410. In this embodiment, the slide restricting pin 422b of the to-be-transmitted leg 422 in the front view right is inserted into the outward slide hole 412c of the base member 410, and the slide restricting pin of the to-be-transmitted leg 422 in the front view 422 b is inserted into the inward slide hole 412 c of the base member 410. Thus, in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restricting pin 422b, the axis of the slide restricting pin 422b is stably supported while being aligned with the opening directions of the slide holes 412b and 412c, and the slide member 420 and the base The member 410 can be non-extractably coupled.

  The front side wall portion 422c is formed in a manner capable of overlapping with the gear teeth of the drive gear 473 in a front view of the assembled state (see FIG. 18).

  When the pair of slide members 420 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 9A), the notched portion 422d has a representative circle slightly larger than the tip circle of the drive gear 473, and the rotation axis and central axis of the drive gear In a front view, the representative circle is formed in a portion projected on the front side wall portion 422c.

  The side wall portion 423 is provided with a notch portion 423 a which is cut in the upper and lower portions of the region where the pivoting hole 421 a of the main body portion 421 is formed. The notch portion 423a has a role as a portion through which the drive lever 467 of the crescent member 460 passes.

  The first axially supporting pin 424 is a double-layered gear adjacent to the axially supported hole 421 a of the raised axially supported pin 424 a in which a plurality (three in the present embodiment) are continuously provided from the back surface of the slide member 420. The pivot pin 424 b is mainly provided.

  Since the raised shaft support pin 424a is provided with a ring-shaped portion of the same height around the periphery, the second gear group 450 to be inserted is raised from the main portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main portion 421) Supported. Thereby, the first gear group 440 can be disposed in the space.

  The rear cover 430 is a member that is closed on the rear surface of the slide member 420 to cover the main body 421 and the pair of side walls 423 of the slide member 420. The rear cover 430 is a pair of insertion through which the slide restricting pin 421d is inserted. Holes 430a are respectively drilled at one end.

  The first gear group 440 is a gear group housed between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430 and meshed with the limited rack gear 414b, and has a deformed gear 441 meshed with the limited rack gear 414b, and A slide rack 442 in which the rack gear 442b is engraved and slid along the slide restricting wall 421c of the slide member 420, a pair of transmission gears 443 transmitting the rotation of the irregular gear 441 to the slide rack 442, and the irregular gear 441 and a pair of transmission gears 443 that is a plate-like member that covers the transmission gear 443 disposed on the side of the differential gear 441 in the axial direction, and an intermediate plate 444 fastened and fixed to the main body 421 of the slide member 420 , Mainly.

  The deformed gear 441 includes starting gear teeth 441a formed larger than the other gear teeth among the gear teeth inscribed.

  The differential gear 441 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are respectively supported by the plurality of second support pins 425 of the slide member 420.

  The slide rack 442 includes a body portion 442a formed in a rectangular bar shape, a rack gear 442b formed on one side surface of the body portion 442a and meshed with the transmission gear 443 and a projection from the side surface of the body portion 442a And a biasing spring 442c locked to the protruding portion.

  The biasing spring 442 c is engaged with the step portion of the slide restricting wall portion 421 c of the slide member 420 to generate a biasing force for pushing back the slide rack 442 to the transmission gear 443 side.

  The intermediate plate 444 is a plate that divides the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450 back and forth, and a pivot pin 444a is provided on the front side.

  Of the plurality of gears of the second gear group 450, the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is supported by the shaft support pin 444a.

  The second gear group 450 has a function of reversing the crescent member 460 by rotating the reversing gear 453 by using the displacement of the slide member 420 in the vertical direction, and plural second gear groups 450 (four in this embodiment) ) And a plurality of transmission gears 451 whose outer end gear is engaged with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410, and the inner end of the transmission gear 451 on the opposite side of the permanent rack gear 414a. On the two-layer gear 452 in which the gear teeth 452a of the upper layer (the layer on the back side) are engaged with the transmission gear 451 pivotally supported, and the divided gear teeth 452b of the layer (the layer on the front side) of the two-layer gear 452 And a reverse gear 453 engaged with the main gear.

  Among the plurality of gears, the transmission gear 451 has the end gear on the side of the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 supported by the pivot pin 444a of the first gear group 440, and the other gears support It is pivotally supported by a pin 424a.

  As described above, since the raised shaft support pin 424a is provided with a ring-shaped portion of the same height around the periphery, the transmission gear 451 is raised from the main portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main portion 421). Supported. As a result, the axial heights of the transmission gear 451 axially supported by the pivot support pin 444a of the first gear group 440 and the other transmission gears 451 can be made to coincide with each other. That is, the plurality of transmission gears 451 are axially supported from each other at a predetermined distance from the main body 421 of the slide member 420.

  The two-layer gear 452 is formed of a resin material and includes gear teeth 452a engraved in the upper layer (layer on the back side), divided gear teeth 452b inscribed in the lower layer (layer on the front side), and upper and lower layers And a sliding wall 452d which is an arc-shaped wall sliding on the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reverse gear 453 (see FIG. 20).

  Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451, when the slide member 420 slides up and down, the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated.

  The lower layer of the two-layer gear 452 is composed of an area in which the dividing gear teeth 452b are engraved and an area in which the sliding wall 452d is formed, and another intermediate on the boundary between the dividing gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall 452d. Starting gear teeth 452b1 larger than gear teeth 452b2 are engraved. The depressions 452 b 3 45 2 b 4 (see FIG. 20) formed on both sides of the starting gear teeth 452 b 1 as gear tooth receiving portions are formed deeper than the depressions between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear teeth 452 b 2. As a result, it is possible to accept start gear teeth 453b1 formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453, which will be described later, in a favorable meshing state (a state in which the gear teeth mesh deeply). Therefore, even when the size of the gear teeth is different for each tooth, the meshing relationship between the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 can be maintained well.

  The recesses 452 b 3 45 2 b 4 formed on both sides of the starting gear teeth 452 b 1 function as receiving parts of the starting gear teeth 453 b 1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23B). Of the depressions 452b and 452b4, the side close to the sliding wall 452d is referred to as a first depression 452b3, and the opposite side of the first depression 452b3 is referred to as a second depression 452b4.

  The gear teeth 452 b are smaller than the start gear teeth 452 b 1 of the divided gear teeth 452 b and larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452 b 2. As a result, as described later, while suppressing deviation of meshing at the start of meshing between the start gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the start gear teeth 453b1 of the reverse gear 453, the accuracy of rotation at the time of meshing continues It can be done.

  The start of the meshing means the time when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start to abut, and is not limited to the case where the gear teeth begin to abut each other. In this embodiment, it means that the start gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453 are in contact with each other.

  Further, the term "continuously engaged" means that the intermediate gear teeth 452b and 453b2 are engaged after the starting gear teeth 452b and 453b1 engage.

  As a method of enlarging the starting gear teeth 452b1, a method of enlarging the tooth width (length along the axial direction of the gear) may be considered. However, in the present embodiment, the tooth widths of the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed to be the same because the two-layer gear 452 can be easily formed in a two-layer structure. ) And make teeth larger.

  The disc portion 452c is formed by being superimposed on the gear teeth of the transmission gear 451 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 and the gear teeth of the reverse gear 453 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 in the axial direction (FIG. 21 (b)) reference). As a result, when the transmission gear 451 and the reverse gear 453 move in the axial direction, the respective gear teeth abut on the disk portion 452 c to suppress the transmission gear 451 and the reverse gear 453 from being shaken. And the further movement of the transmission gear 451 and the reverse gear 453 can be suppressed.

  The reversing gear 453 is a member that reverses the crescent member 460 by being engaged with the two-layer gear 452 and rotated, and is formed into a cylindrical main body 453a into which the cylindrical main body 462a of the crescent member 460 can be inserted. And a reverse gear tooth 453b formed outward from one end of the main body 453a, and a main body 453a formed adjacent to the reverse gear tooth 453b in a direction along the outer periphery of the cylindrical main body 462a. An arc-shaped recess 453c, which is an arc-shaped wall surface disposed on the axis of the shaft and sliding on the sliding wall 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and a wide projecting portion in which the arc-shaped recess 453c is formed An engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d and a locking protrusion 453e protruding in the radial direction from a position obtained by dividing the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 453a into three equal parts are mainly included.

  The reversing gear teeth 453b are provided with start gear teeth 453b1 larger in size (tooth thickness and tooth marks) than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 (gear teeth other than the both ends) at both ends. The recess 453b3 formed between the start gear tooth 453b1 and the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d as a gear tooth receiving portion is deeper than the recess formed between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear teeth 453b2. It is formed. As a result, the starter gear teeth 452b1 formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 can be received in a favorable meshing state (the gear teeth meshing deeply). Therefore, even when the size of the gear teeth is different for each tooth, the meshing relationship between the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 can be maintained well.

  The arc-shaped concave portion 453c is a portion that is in contact with the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and is formed with a radius of curvature substantially the same as the radius of the sliding wall portion 452d.

  The locking projection 453 e is fitted to the arc-shaped wall portion 461 c formed on the main body portion 461 of the crescent member 460 in a non-rotatable manner. Thereby, the reversing gear 453 and the meniscal member 460 are integrally rotated.

  Next, the meniscal member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the crescent member 460, and FIG. 15 is a back perspective view of the crescent member 460. FIG. FIGS. 14 and 15 illustrate the front cover 466 removed from the main body 461 of the crescent member 460.

  The crescent member 460 is a member disposed at the center of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 10) and pivoted in such a manner that the upper and lower sides are reversed as the slide member 420 slides, and the semicircular plate A central gear 462 having a main body 461 which is a member and serving as a framework of the crescent member 460, and a cylindrical main body 462a inserted through a connection hole 461a drilled near the center of the main body 461 And a crank gear 464 having a slide pin 464b inserted through a slide hole 463a formed at the root of the claw member 463. A transmission gear group 465 disposed between the gear 462 and the crank gear 464 and meshed with the center gear 462 and the crank gear 464; A cover 466 before the front side is fastened parts 461 mainly includes the drive lever 467 (see FIG. 12), a to be fastened to the ends of the tubular body 462a of the center gear 462.

  The main body 461 has a connecting hole 461a through which the central gear 462 is inserted, a plurality of shaft support pins 461b on which the crank gear 464 and the transmission gear group 465 are supported, and an inner periphery of the reverse gear 453 around the connecting hole 461a. An arc-shaped wall 461c having a slightly smaller outer diameter and having a notch formed therein and having a notch into which the locking projection 453e can be fitted, a hook-shaped flange 461d on which an urging spring is hooked, and a back surface And a locking pin 461e which is provided in a protruding manner.

  The locking pin 461e is inserted through the rotation restricting hole 421b of the slide member 420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21A). Thereby, the rotation angle of the meniscal member 460 is regulated.

  The central gear 462 includes a cylindrical main body 462a inserted into the connection hole 461a of the main body 461, a flange portion 462b radially formed in a flange shape from one end of the cylindrical main body 462a, and the flange portion A drive lever 467 is formed so as to be able to be fastened and fixed to gear teeth 462c engraved radially inward from the outer peripheral surface of 462b and the other end which is the opposite end of one end of the cylindrical main body 462a. Fastening holes 462d are mainly provided, and hook-like hooks 462e in which one end is hooked to the hook 461d of the main body 461 and the other end of the biasing spring is hooked.

  The claw member 463 mainly includes a long-hole-like slide hole 463a through which the slide pin 464b of the crank gear 464 is inserted, and a slide plate portion 463b which is a long plate-like body protruding on the front side. .

  The slide plate portion 463 b is inserted into a long slide hole 466 a formed in the front cover 466. Thus, the claw member 463 is formed slidably in the extending direction of the slide hole 466 a of the front cover 466.

  The crank gear 464 is axially supported by the pivot pin 461b of the main body 461 and has a gear tooth engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and a slide which is eccentrically protruded from the rotation axis of the main body 464a. And a pin 464b.

  The main body portion 464 a is engaged with the center gear 462 and the transmission gear group 465 so as to be rotated as the center gear 462 rotates.

  The slide pin 464b is moved about the respective pivot support pins 461b as the main body portion 464a is rotated. Thereby, the slide pin 464 b is moved between a first position (see FIG. 14) disposed close to the central gear 462 and a second position disposed away from the central gear 462. By the movement of the slide pin 464b, the claw member 463 is moved along the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466 (see FIG. 26 (b)).

  The front cover 466 is a member which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body 461 and accommodates each member of the half-moon member 460 between the main cover 461 and the main body 461. A long slide hole 466a is drilled.

  The drive lever 467 is a long plate shaped lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) extending radially outward, and a through hole 467b (see FIG. 13) which is aligned with the fastening hole 462d of the central gear 462 (see FIG. 13) and, mainly.

  The lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) is a portion pushed by the slide rack 442, and when the lever portion 467a is pushed by the slide rack 442, the central gear 462 is rotated.

  Referring back to FIG. 10 to FIG. The driving device 470 is disposed on the front side at a central portion of the base member 410, and is provided with a fastening plate portion 471 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, and a drive motor 472 fastened and fixed to the fastening plate portion 471. And a drive gear 473 inserted into the drive shaft of the drive motor 472.

  The fastening plate portion 471 is formed in an arc shape in cross section along the outer shape of the motor case of the drive gear 472 and includes a pair of restricting wall portions 471a and 471b extending to the front side. In the assembled state, the inner side extends to a substantially middle position of the motor case, and the other restricting wall portion 471b (outside in the assembled state) extends longer than the extended end of one of the restricting wall portions 471a. The pair of restricting wall portions 471 a and 471 b is used as a guide when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471.

  The drive gear 473 is disposed opposite to the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 from both sides, and is meshed from both sides.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19, an outline of the movement of the pair of slide members 420 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. 16 and 18 are partial front views of combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 17 (a) is a partial cross sectional view of combined operation unit 400 taken along line XVIIa-XVIIa of FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 (b) is 17A is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 after moving the drive device 470 from FIG. 17A, and FIG. 19A is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 along line XIXa-XIXa of FIG. FIG. 19B is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 after the drive motor 472 is separated from the drive gear 473 from FIG. 19A. 16 and 17 show a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 18 and 19 illustrate a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the pair of slide members 420 sandwich the drive gear 473 of the drive device 470 with each other between the receiving leg portions 422. At this time, the rack gear 422 a of the transmission leg 422 oppositely disposed with the drive gear 473 in between is engaged with the single drive gear 473. As a result, the drive gear 473 is rotated by the drive motor 472 so that the to-be-transmitted legs 422 opposite to each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween slide in synchronization.

  That is, in a state where the slide member 420 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the upper slide member 420 is downwardly moved downward by the drive gear 473 being rotated clockwise in a front view. Are moved upward at the same speed. At this time, the drive motors 472 disposed in a pair on the left and right are synchronously controlled, and the slide members can slide stably.

  In addition, the weight of each of the pair of slide members 420 is applied to the drive gear 473 in the opposite direction. For example, weight is applied to the drive gear 473 on the right side in a front view from the upper slide member 420 in a direction to rotate the drive gear 473 clockwise, and the lower slide member 420 rotates the drive gear 473 counterclockwise. Weight is applied in the direction of rotation. Thereby, if the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are equalized, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut, the balance of the weights of the pair of slide members 420 can keep the drive gear 473 stopped. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut when the pair of slide members 420 is disposed at an arbitrary position, the pair of slide members 420 can be kept stopped at that position.

  The pair of receiving legs 422 of the slide member 420 is meshed with the drive gear 473 in the same direction. That is, for example, the left and right paired receiving legs 422 of the upper slide member 420 are meshed with the drive gear 473 from the right in front view, and the left and right paired receiving legs 422 of the lower slide member 420 are Both are engaged with the drive gear 473 from the left in front view.

  Thereby, even if one of the transmission receiving legs 422 meshed with the drive gear 473 moves suddenly (for example, even if it moves in a direction to increase the distance from the meshed drive gear 473), The other receiving leg 422 connected to one receiving leg 422 and the main body 421 is moved in the same direction as the receiving leg 422. That is, since the movement is made in the direction away from the drive gear 473 engaged, it is possible to suppress the application of a large load to the drive gear 473 engaged with the other receiving leg portion 422.

  Here, for example, one receiving leg 422 of the slide member 420 is engaged with the drive gear 473 from the front view right side, and the other receiving leg 422 is engaged with the drive gear 473 from the front view left side. The other transferred leg 422 is pressed against the drive gear 473 by moving the one transferred leg 422 in the direction in which the distance from the drive gear 473 increases. As a result, a large load is applied to the drive gear 473 engaged with the other transferred leg 422.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied to the drive gear 473. Therefore, the gearing relationship between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the receiving leg 422 is appropriate. Can be implemented. Further, the shapes of the pair of slide members 420 can be made equal, and the members can be made common.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c interfere with each other in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 19A). On the other hand, in the state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being spaced apart from the outer shape of the notch portion 422d in front view. The positional relationship between the slide member 420 and the drive gear 473 in which the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state spaced apart from the outer shape of the notch portion 422d in a front view will be described as a specific phase position.

  Therefore, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch 422 d formed in the receiving leg 422 in a state where the pair of slide members 420 is disposed at the retracted position (specific phase position) which is the end of the movable range. . Thus, the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 420 from the base member 410 (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, the maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

  Here, the pair of slide members 420 are disposed opposite to each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween, and are meshed with the drive gear 473 by the rack gear 422 a of each of the receiving leg portions 422. In this state, since the pair of slide members 420 need to form a state in which both are similarly disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a are engaged with arbitrary gear teeth. Is not a good thing. That is, the relationship between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 is fixed (the representative gear teeth of the rack gear 422a are in contact with the representative gear teeth of the drive gear 473 at the time of engagement). Form a proper meshing condition.

  The notch 422d of the slide member 420 can be used to form the proper meshing state. That is, as described above, in the state where the pair of slide members 420 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the representative circle slightly larger than the tip circle of the drive gear 473 rotates the drive gear 473. When arranged in alignment with the axis and the central axis, it is formed in a portion projected on the front side wall portion 422c in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16).

  Therefore, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the cutouts 422d are disposed opposite to each other. In this state, the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a can be meshed in a proper meshing state by moving the drive gear 473 through the notch 422d (moving in the vertical direction in FIG. 16).

  In the state where the pair of slide members 420 is disposed at the retracted position (specific phase position), the movement of the pair of slide members 420 outward in the vertical direction is blocked (the upper slide member 420 is the upper slide member on the lower side) 420 blocks further movement downward). That is, when the slide member 420 is randomly moved to the retracted position, the slide member 420 is stopped at least at the retracted position (movement resistance increases).

  Therefore, in position adjustment of the slide member 420 when the maintenance worker replaces the drive gear 473, even if the slide member 420 is moved in the retraction direction at random, the slide member 420 is at the end of the movable range. Stop at position). Thus, the drive gear 473 can be easily taken out through the notch portion 422d, and the drive gear 473 can be easily meshed with the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 in that state. Therefore, maintainability can be improved.

  The arrangement of the drive device 470 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (a). As described above, since the notches 422d are formed in the pair of slide members 420, the drive device 470 in the assembled state is fastened and fixed to the base member 410 in the state where the pair of slide members 420 are disposed at the retracted position. be able to. Thereby, the arrangement freedom of the drive device 470 can be improved.

  That is, when the notch 422d is not formed in the front side wall 422c of the slide member 420 (for example, when the front side wall 422c is formed in the entire area of the rack gear 422a), the driving device 470 is mounted on the base member 410. Even when assembling, the drive gear 473 abuts on the front side wall portion 422c, and the drive device 470 can not be assembled to the base member 410. Therefore, the drive device 470 has to be disposed on the opposite side of the front side wall portion 422c, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the drive device 470 is low.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the notch 422d is formed in the front side wall 422c, the drive gear 473 is moved in the front-rear direction through the notch 422d. It can be disposed on the front side (the side on which the front side wall portion 422c is disposed). Thus, the degree of freedom in arranging the drive device 470 can be improved.

  Further, the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 is formed in the layer between the drive gear 473 and the drive motor 472, and the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c are back and forth by moving the slide member 420 from the retracted position. It can be superimposed in a direction view (view in the plane of FIG. 16). Thereby, when replacing the drive device 470, it is possible to select whether the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 are removed together or only the drive motor 472 is removed leaving the drive gear 473.

  That is, the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be separated by pulling out the drive motor 472 while keeping the drive gear 473 in contact with the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 19B). . Thus, the drive motor 472 can be replaced while maintaining the meshing state of the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422 a of the receiving leg 422. Therefore, before and after the replacement of the drive motor 472, it is possible to eliminate the need for re-engagement adjustment of the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422 a of the to-be-transmitted leg 422, thereby improving maintainability.

  At this time, the drive gear 473 overlaps the front side wall portions 422c of the pair of the receiving leg portions 422 disposed opposite to each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the drive gear 473 is pulled out from the drive motor 472, a force is applied to the drive gear 473 from at least two points disposed facing each other across the rotation shaft. Therefore, tilting of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 is suppressed.

  Further, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471, the drive motor 472 can be moved along the control wall portions 471a and 471b while being pressed against the control wall portions 471a and 471b. The axial center can be prevented from tilting relative to the drive gear 473. Thereby, deformation of the drive gear 473 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, one of the control wall portions 471a is formed to retract toward the fastening plate portion 471 with respect to the front end surface of the motor case of the drive motor 472. As a result, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out with the extended end of the one control wall portion 471a as the fulcrum S. That is, since the extending end of one restricting wall portion 471a and the side surface of the drive motor 472 are disposed adjacent to each other, the extending end of the one restricting wall portion 471a serves as a fulcrum S and the side surface of the drive motor 472 (FIG. In (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the action point W is illustrated in the inside of the drive motor 472) and the action point W is the shortest. It can be done. Thus, depending on the setting of the power point, the force required to pull out the drive motor 472 can be suppressed. Note that FIG. 19 (a) illustrates the relationship between the fulcrum S and the action point W and a virtual ladder.

  Further, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor 472 against the other control wall 471 b disposed opposite to the one control wall 471 a. Thus, the degree of inclination of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 can be suppressed when the drive motor 472 is pulled out.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the other restriction wall 471b is formed to project forward (upward in FIG. 19 (a)) than the extended end of the one restriction wall 471a. Thus, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out with the one control wall portion 471a as the fulcrum S, the drive motor 472 is moved from the other control wall portion 471b in the state W1 in which the action point W is closest to the other control wall portion 471b. A force directed in the direction of pushing back to the action point W can be applied. Therefore, the movement of the drive motor 472 in the direction perpendicular to the drive shaft can be prevented by the other restriction wall portion 471b. Thus, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out, the drive motor 472 can be reliably prevented from moving in the direction away from the one control wall portion 471a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the two-layer gear 452 involved in the rotation of the half-moon member 460 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. FIG. 20 (a) is a front view of the double-layer gear 452, and FIG. 20 (b) is a rear view of the double-layer gear 452.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the double-layer gear 452 is a gear member in which different gear teeth are engraved on the front side and the back side with the disk portion 452c as a boundary. As shown in FIG. 20A, the starting gear teeth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall 452d are formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, as described later, the starting gear teeth 452b1 can have durability that can endure a collision (contact) with the reversing gear 453. In the present embodiment, only the starting gear teeth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d are formed in a large size, and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed in a small size. Therefore, the durability is improved and the material cost is suppressed. It is possible to achieve both.

  The double-layer gear 452 has a recess bottom wall portion 452e as a wall surface forming the bottom of the first recess portion 452b3 and the second recess portion 452b4, and a push-back rib 452f connecting the recess bottom wall portion 452e and a ring-shaped rib And.

  Here, the second recess 452 b 4 needs to have a sufficient depth for receiving the starting gear teeth 453 b 1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23), while the first recess 452 b 3 engages the reversing gear 453. The protrusion receiving portion 453d is a recess into which the protrusion receiving portion 453d enters. Therefore, although the depth as deep as the second recess 452b4 is not required, in the present embodiment, the depths of the first recess 452b3 and the second recess 452b4 are substantially the same. As a result, the amount of thermal contraction of the resin material in the vicinity of the first recessed portion 452 b 3 and the second recessed portion 452 b 4 at the time of molding of the two-layer gear 452 can be made uniform, and the formability of the two-layer gear 452 can be improved. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), a space is formed in a region surrounded by the sliding wall 452d, the wall formed by the bottom of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and the hollow bottom wall 452e. At this time, since the plate thickness of the sliding wall portion 452d and the depression bottom wall portion 452e is substantially the same, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sink marks unique to resin molding. Moreover, the material cost of the resin material can be suppressed.

  Here, the recessed bottom wall 452 e is not necessarily required to ensure the function of the double-layer gear 452. On the other hand, the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the sliding wall 452d are connected by the recessed bottom wall 452e. Therefore, the impact when the starting gear tooth 452b1 abuts on the reverse gear 453 can be dispersed (see FIG. 23B).

  The push-back rib 452 f is connected to the depression bottom wall 452 e of the second depression 452 b 4. Here, the direction (see FIG. 23B) of the line of force of the force F generated when the reverse gear 453 abuts on the starting gear tooth 452b1 is directed to the push-back rib 452f. Thereby, even in the case where a space is formed in the region surrounded by the sliding wall 452 d of the double-layer gear 452, the wall formed by the bottom of the intermediate gear teeth 452 b 2, and the depressed bottom wall 452 e, the push-back rib 452 f The resistance to the force F can be improved by this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the start gear teeth 452b1 from being deformed by an impact at the time of contact.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (b), gear teeth 452 a are formed around the double layer gear 452. Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 21B), the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down (see FIG. 21A). .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, details of the movement of the combined operation unit 400, that is, the movement of the slide member 420 and the meniscal member 460 moved by the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 470 will be described. Do. 21 to 26 explain the operation of the combined operation unit 400 in time series. In FIG. 21 to FIG. 26, the back cover 430 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

  FIGS. 21 (a) and 22 (a) are rear views of the combined operation unit 400, and FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (b) are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453. Note that FIG. 21 illustrates a state in which the pair of slide members 420 is disposed at the retracted position, and in FIG. 22, the pair of slide members are slid for a predetermined distance from the retracted position, and the engagement protrusion of the reverse gear 453 is engaged. A state in which the end of the shape receiving portion 453d is disposed to face the first recess 452b3 of the double-layer gear 452 is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (b), the split gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall 452d of the double-layer gear 452 are shown by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disc portion 452c are shown by imaginary lines. Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in a state in which the pair of slide members 420 is disposed at the retracted position, in the reverse gear 453, the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the engagement projecting portion 453d slides on the double-layer gear 452 It is circumscribed to the wall 452d. Thereby, the posture of the reverse gear 453 can be maintained.

  In this case, mechanical engagement between the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d and the sliding wall portion 452d acts as a holding mechanism for maintaining the posture of the reverse gear 453. Therefore, in order to maintain the posture of the reverse gear 453, it is not necessary to provide another member such as an elastic spring.

  The sliding wall 452 d of the double gear 452 and the engagement protrusion 453 d of the reverse gear 453 abut on both sides of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the double gear 452 and the rotation axis of the reverse gear 453. Be done. Therefore, the rotation of the reverse gear 453 can be prevented without depending on the rotation direction of the reverse gear 453, and the posture of the reverse gear 453 can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, when the pair of slide members 420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 among the plurality of transmission gears 451 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the other transmission gear 451 and the two-layer gear 452 engaged with the transmission gear 451 by the gear teeth 452 are also rotated. On the other hand, since the reversing gear 453 is not meshed with the two-layer gear 452, the reversing gear 453 is maintained in the same attitude as the retracted position.

  While the pair of slide members 420 are moving, the arcuate recess 453 c of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453 d receives sliding friction from the sliding wall 452 d of the two-layer gear 452. In the present embodiment, the arc-shaped recessed portion 453c of the engagement protruding receiving portion 453d is circumscribed to the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, thereby suppressing concentration of sliding friction at one location, The frictional force can be dispersed throughout the arc-shaped recess 453c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the application of a large force locally to the reversing gear 453 from the two-layer gear 452. In addition, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reverse gear 453 can be improved by increasing the number of places where the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 contact each other.

  23 (a) and 23 (b) are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453, respectively. In FIG. 23 (a), a state in which the double-layer gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount in rear view from FIG. 22 (b) is illustrated, and in FIG. 23 (b), FIG. A state in which the double-layer gear 452 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount in rear view from the state is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 23, the split gear teeth 452 b and the sliding wall portion 452 d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452 a and the disk portion 452 c are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 22B, before the reversing gear 453 abuts on the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452, the end of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 is the two-layer gear It is disposed opposite to the first hollow 452 b 3 452.

  At this time, since the end of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d disposed to face the first recess 452b3 is not in contact with the double-layer gear 452, the effect of maintaining the attitude of the reverse gear 453 is released. It is possible to rotate 1 in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 22B).

  As shown in FIG. 23A, when the double-layer gear 452 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 23A, the reverse gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 Are rotated before That is, the reverse gear 453 is rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452 d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453 d of the reverse gear 453. At this time, the reverse gear 453 is rotated in such a manner as to cause the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453 d to enter the first recessed portion 452 b 3 of the two-layer gear 452.

  That is, after the reversing gear 453 is slightly rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452 d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engagement projecting receiving portion 453 d of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23A), The start gear teeth 452b1 of the layer gear 452 are abutted (see FIG. 23 (b)). As a result, it is possible to suppress an impact when the reverse gear 453 and the start gear teeth 452 b 1 of the two-layer gear 452 abut.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), the position where the start gear teeth 452 b 1 of the double gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start to abut is a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the double gear 452 and the rotation axis of the reverse gear 453. Rather, it is formed at a position returned to the opposite side of the rotational direction of the two-layer gear 452 (above FIG. 23B).

  As a result, the component applied to the reversing gear 453 when the starting gear teeth 452 b 1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to abut each other is a component in which the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 is It is divided and transmitted to the component that turns to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reverse gear 453 from rotating too much when the start gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start to abut on each other.

  That is, when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 starts to abut on the reverse gear 453, the teeth do not necessarily mesh with each other from the beginning. Therefore, when the force applied in the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 when contacting the starting gear teeth 452 b 1 of the double layer gear 452 is excessive, the reversing gear 453 rotates faster than the double layer gear 452 ( May move). In that case, there is a possibility that the meshing between the double gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 may fail.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the force applied from the double-layer gear 452 to the reversing gear 453 at the start of the contact is also generated in the direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 (direction toward the rotation axis). The rotational resistance of the reverse gear 453 can be temporarily raised. That is, the rotational resistance can be increased by pressing the reverse gear 453 against the rotation shaft. Thus, it is possible to prevent the reverse gear 453 from rotating too much when the double layer gear 452 starts to abut on the start gear teeth 452b1.

  Further, since the starting gear teeth 452b1 453b1 are formed larger than the gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 452, it is possible to prevent gear loss at the start of meshing between the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. .

  Here, the larger the gear teeth, the larger the play (backlash) formed. Therefore, the larger the teeth are, the larger the shift in the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the gears engaged in the middle. become. That is, when the gear teeth are miniaturized, even if the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the engaged gears is slightly shifted, there is a possibility that the engaged teeth may be dislocated.

  In this embodiment, the double-layer gear 452 is more than the play (backlash) generated between the transmission gear 451 to which the driving force of the drive device 470 (see FIG. 10) is transmitted and the gear teeth 452 a of the double-layer gear 452. The play (backlash) generated between the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reverse gear 453 is larger. That is, the deviation of the phase relation of the double-layer gear 452 caused in relation to the transmission gear 451 is smaller than the deviation of the phase relation between the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453, and is acceptable. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the tooth shift at the start of the engagement of the double-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453.

  When the double-layer gear 452 starts to abut on the reverse gear 453 in the rotational direction, the starting gear teeth 452 b 1 of the double-layer gear 452 begins to abut on the engagement protrusion 453 d of the reverse gear 453. That is, the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d is used as a substitute for the gear teeth that begin to be engaged with the starting gear teeth 452b1. Thereby, the durability of the reverse gear 453 can be improved.

  That is, the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d in which the arc-shaped concave portion 453c is formed is not a part of the role of meshing with the gear teeth of the two-layer gear 452, but abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 452 It is part of the role of maintaining the posture of 453. Therefore, the size is not limited according to the size of the mating gear tooth to be engaged, as in the case of the gear tooth. In addition, it is desirable that the portion to be abutted at the start of the abutment between the engagement projection receiving portion 453d of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 be large and durable, and the engagement projection reception portion 453d By using it, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

  As the slide member 420 is moved by the driving force of the drive device 470 (see FIG. 10), the transmission gear 451 engaged with the permanent rack gear 414a is rotated, and the two-layer gear 452 is rotated accordingly. That is, the drive unit 470 and the double-layer gear 452 are not directly meshed, but at least the receiving leg 422 meshed with the drive gear 473 intervenes between the drive unit 470 and the double-layer gear 452 Do. Thereby, the impact at the time of contact between the start gear teeth 452 b 1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 is transmitted to the drive device 470 in a relaxed state. Therefore, damage to the drive device 470 due to an impact at the time of contact can be prevented.

  FIGS. 24 (a) and 25 (a) are rear views of the combined operation unit 400, and FIGS. 24 (b) and 25 (b) are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453. Note that FIG. 24 illustrates the pair of meniscal members 460 rotated from the state of FIG. 22 (a) by a predetermined amount, and FIG. 25 illustrates the pair of meniscal members 460 from the state of FIG. 22 (a). The state immediately after the 180 degree rotation is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 24B and 25B, in the double-layer gear 452, the divided gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines. Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 24B, when the crescent member 460 is rotated, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 mesh with each other.

  In the present embodiment, the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear teeth 452b1 brought into contact with the reverse gear 453 at the start of the contact with the reverse gear 453 can be improved, and breakage of the double-layer gear 452 can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the double layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 are engaged by the intermediate gear teeth 452b and 453b2 so that the backlash is more pronounced at the time of continuation of the engagement than at the start of the engagement. Can be made smaller. Thereby, the rotation of the reverse gear 453 can be made smooth at the time of continuous engagement. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both the improvement in the durability of the starting gear teeth 452b1 collided at the start of the engagement and the improvement in the smoothness of the rotation of the reverse gear 453.

  Further, since the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 452 are smaller than the gear teeth 452a, the circumferential meshing of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 is performed. The error (play) of the above occurs smaller than the error of the meshing between the gear teeth 452 a and the transmission gear 451. As a result, the accuracy of the operation of the reverse gear 453 at the time of continuing the meshing can be maintained at or below the error of the meshing between the gear teeth 452 a and the transmission gear 451.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the crescent member 460 has rotated 180 degrees, the meshing between the double gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 is released, and the sliding wall 452 d of the double gear 452 and the circle of the reversing gear The arc-shaped recess 453c is abutted in a surface. Therefore, the crescent member 460 in which the posture of the reverse gear 453 is maintained, and the locking projection 453 e (see FIG. 12) of the reverse gear 453 and the arc-shaped wall portion 461 c (see FIG. 15) Attitude is also maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the operation of the claw member 463 of the crescent member 460 will be described. 26 (a) and 26 (b) are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 400. FIG.

  In FIG. 26, the illustration of the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is partially omitted, and the limited rack gear 414b is made visible and the part thereof is enlarged. 26 (a) shows the state immediately before the starting gear teeth 441a of the deformed gear 441 abut against the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b, and FIG. 26 (b) shows the movement of the slide rack 442 The state of reaching the end is illustrated.

  The meshing between the oddly shaped gear teeth 441 and the limited rack gear 414b is defective unless the oddly shaped gear 441 is in contact with the limited rack gear 414b in an appropriate posture. That is, if the variant gear 441 is abutted against the limited rack gear 414b in a posture in which the starting gear teeth 441a of the variant gear 441 and the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b are abutted, the gear is engaged well. On the other hand, for example, when gear teeth of the irregular gear 441 and gear teeth other than the start gear teeth 441a abut on the start gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b, the meshing failure occurs in the middle of the meshing. The rotation of the irregular gear 441 can not be continued. In this case, since the slide movement of the slide member 420 is also stopped, the slide member 420 causes a malfunction.

  In the present embodiment, the slide rack 442 is maintained laterally outward by the biasing force of the biasing spring 442c. The deformed gear 441 receives a force from the slide rack 442 via the transmission gear 443. Therefore, the attitude of the oddly shaped gear 441 can be maintained at the above-mentioned appropriate attitude.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the transmission gear 443 is rotated and the slide rack 442 is moved by meshing the deformed gear 441 with the limited rack gear 414b and rotating. The slide rack 442 abuts on the drive lever 467 in the middle of movement, and the drive lever 467 rotates. Since the drive lever 467 is fastened and fixed to the central gear 462 (see FIG. 15) of the semilunar member 460, the central gear 462 is rotated by the rotation of the drive lever 467. Thereby, the crank gear 464 is rotated (see FIG. 14), and the claw member 463 is moved in the protruding direction. Thus, the claw member 463 can be moved in conjunction with the movement of the slide member 420.

  Next, a combined operation unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the notch 422d of the receiving leg 422 is disposed opposite to the front side of the drive gear 473 in the state where the slide member 420 is disposed at the retracted position has been described, but the second embodiment In the combined operation unit 2400, the notch 2422d of the receiving leg 2422 is disposed on the front side of the drive gear 473 while the slide member 2420 moves from the retracted position to the extended position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  27 and 28 are front views of a pair of slide members 2420. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 2420 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 28 shows that the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position and start gear teeth 452b1 of the second gear group 450 and the start A state in which the gear 453b1 (see FIG. 23B) starts to abut is illustrated. Also, the illustration of the drive device 470 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in a state in which the pair of slide members 2420 are disposed at the retracted position, they are provided on the front side (the front side of the page of FIG. 27) of the drive gear 473. The front side wall portion 2422c is overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at positions where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 (see FIG. 23B) of the reverse gear 453 begin to abut. In the state, the notch portion 2422 d is formed on the front side (the front side in FIG. 27) of the drive gear 473. The notch portion 2422 d is formed in a circular shape slightly larger than a tip circle of the drive gear 473.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being separated from the outer shape of the notch portion 2422d in a front view (specific phase position). Therefore, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch 2422d formed in the receiving leg 2422. Thus, the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 2420 from the base member 2410. Therefore, the maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position and the start gear teeth 452 b 1 and the start gear teeth 453 b 1 (see FIG. 23A) of the second gear group 450 begin to abut Therefore, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the increase in resistance when moving the slide member 2420.

  That is, when the slide member 2420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 24A) is always meshed with the permanent rack gear 414 a of the base member 2410. Therefore, when the resistance of rotation of the transmission gear 451 is increased, it can be grasped as the movement resistance of the slide member 2420. Here, since the transmission gear 451 is meshed with the two-layer gear 452, the resistance generated when the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start meshing is transmitted to the transmission gear 451. Then, the resistance to rotation of the transmission gear 451 is increased, so that the movement resistance of the slide member 2420 is increased. Thus, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the increase in the movement resistance of the slide member 2420.

  Here, at the specific phase position, since the front side wall portion 2422 c does not overlap the drive gear 473, the effect of suppressing the wobbling of the drive gear 473 when the front side wall portion 2422 c is in contact with the drive gear 473 is weakened.

  In this embodiment, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch 2422 d coincides with the drive gear 473) is formed during the movement of the pair of slide members 2420, ie, the rotation of the drive gear 473. Therefore, when the drive gear 473 reaches the specific phase position, the drive gear 473 has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (vertically perpendicular direction). Therefore, the wobbling of the drive gear 473 which is likely to occur at the specific phase position can be alleviated by the momentum of the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction.

  The base member 2410 is provided with a triangular protrusion 2415 which protrudes in the center side (center side in FIG. 27) in the assembled state. It is possible to easily move the pair of slide members 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the triangular projection 2415.

  Here, when the drive motor 472 is removed together with the drive gear 473 in maintenance of the gaming machine 13, it is necessary to arrange the slide member 2420 at a specific phase position. However, since the drive motor 472 is disposed on the front side so as to hide the slide member 2420 (see FIG. 9), it is difficult to visually recognize the state where the notch 2422 d matches the drive gear 473 from the front side. is there. Therefore, it is difficult to arrange the slide member 2420 at a specific phase position.

  On the other hand, since the triangular protrusion 2415 is disposed at a position where it can be viewed from the front side, it is possible to facilitate alignment of the slide member 2410 by relying on the triangular protrusion 2415 in maintenance. In the present embodiment, when the pair of slide members 2420 is disposed at the specific phase position, the triangular protrusion 2415 and the triangular pattern formed at the end of the slide member 2420 form a series of patterns. This makes it easy for the maintenance worker to remove the drive gear 473 and perform maintenance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, the double layer gear 3452 and the reverse gear 3453 in the third embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 453b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are formed large in the rotational axis direction view, that is, the case where the tooth height and the tooth thickness are increased has been described. The double-layer gear 3452 and the reversing gear 3453 in the third embodiment are formed in a large size in the axial direction while the starting gear teeth 3452b1 and 3453b1 are formed in the same shape as other gear teeth in the rotational axis direction view That is, the tooth width is formed large. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  29 (a) is a front view of the two-layer gear 3452, FIG. 29 (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear 3452, and FIG. 29 (c) is a side view of the two-layer gear 3452. .

  As shown in FIG. 29, the double-layer gear 3452 is disposed adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d and has a large gear width, and includes start gear teeth 3452b1 and the tooth base side of the start gear teeth 3452b1. A circumferential rib 3452e extending along the concentric circle of the two-layer gear 3452 from the circumferential side surface and fixed to the front end face of the root side of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1; A radial rib 3452f extending mainly from the radial side surface of the tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation axis and fixed to the front end face of the main body of the two-layer gear 3452 is mainly provided.

  The start gear teeth 3452b1 have a tooth height and a tooth thickness substantially the same as that of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2, but the tooth width is larger than that of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Thereby, the rigidity of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 can be improved, and breakage of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 can be suppressed at the start of meshing with the reverse gear 3453.

  The circumferential rib 3452e is formed widest in the axial direction of the double-layer gear 3452 at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3452b1, that is, at the extension base point, and the width is gradually shortened as it is separated from the starting gear tooth 3452b1. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape in bottom view. The circumferential rib 3452e can improve the rigidity of the starting gear teeth 3452b along the circumferential direction of the double layer gear 3452 and can prevent the starting gear teeth 3452b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

  The circumferential rib 3452e is extended to the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in the vicinity of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 (up to two next to the starting gear teeth 3452b1 in this embodiment). As a result, it is possible to generate a force to draw the root of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 toward the starting gear teeth 3452b1 using the circumferential rib 3452e.

  That is, when the intermediate gear teeth 452 b 2 near the starting gear teeth 3452 b 1 and the reverse gear 3453 mesh with each other, deformation (deformation in a direction away from the starting gear teeth 3452 b 1) caused in the intermediate gear teeth 452 b 2 is Can be suppressed.

  The circumferential rib 3452e is fixed only to the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 in the vicinity of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 because the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 located away from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 reverses after the rotation becomes steady. By being engaged with the gear 3453.

  That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 (for example, the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the middle of the pair of starting gear teeth 3452b1) apart from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 is engaged with the reversing gear 3453, the rotation is already in a steady state , Reverse gear 3453 has a sufficient rotational speed. Therefore, the force that the intermediate gear teeth 452 b 2 receive from the reverse gear 3453 is small, and the reinforcement by the circumferential rib 3452 e is unnecessary.

  The radial rib 3452f extends from the radial side surface of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation axis and is fixed to the front end face of the main body of the two-layer gear 3452. The radial rigidity of 3452b1 can be improved. As a result, the reverse gear 3453 meshed with the two-layer gear 3452 is moved in the axial direction and rattled, so that the front end (the upper end in FIG. 29B) of the start gear teeth 3452b1 is directed to the rotation axis. Even if the start gear teeth 3452b1 are prevented from falling. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 can be improved.

  FIG. 30 (a) is a front view of the reversing gear 3453, FIG. 30 (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 3453, and FIG. 30 (c) is a side view of the reversing gear 3453.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the reversing gear 3453 is extended along the concentric circle of the reversing gear 3453 from the starting gear teeth 3453b1 adjacent to the arc-shaped concave portion 453c and the side surface of the starting gear teeth 3453b1 on the tooth base side. And a circumferential rib 3453f fixed to the main body of the reversing gear 3453.

  The start gear teeth 3453b1 have a tooth height and a tooth thickness substantially the same as those of the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2, while the tooth width is larger than those of the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2. Thereby, the rigidity of the starting gear teeth 3453b1 can be improved.

  The circumferential rib 3453f is formed widest in the axial direction at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3453b1, that is, at the extension base point, and the width is gradually shortened as it is separated from the starting gear tooth 3453b1. That is, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape in bottom view. The circumferential rib 3453f can prevent the starting gear teeth 3453b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

  The circumferential rib 3453f is extended toward the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d adjacent to the starting gear tooth 3453b1. As a result, the rigidity of the starting gear teeth 3453b1 in the direction in which a force is applied from the double-layer gear 3452 (the direction from the starting gear teeth 3453b1 toward the adjacent engaging projecting portion 453d) is improved. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear teeth 3453b1 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the double layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 are formed large in the rotational axis direction view, that is, the case where the tooth height and the tooth thickness are increased has been described. In the double-layer gear 4452, while the starting gear teeth 4452b1 are formed in the same shape as other gear teeth in the rotational axis direction view, the tooth width is formed large and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2 interposed between the starting gear teeth 4452b1. The width of the teeth is formed in such a manner as to be further shortened as it is separated from the starting gear teeth 4452b1. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  31 (a) is a front view of the double-layer gear 4452, FIG. 31 (b) is a bottom view of the double-layer gear 4452, and FIG. 31 (c) is XXXIc-XXXIc of FIG. 31 (b). FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of dual layer gear 4452 in a line.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the double-layer gear 4452 comprises a pair of starting gear teeth 4452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall 452d, an intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 formed between the starting gear teeth 4452b1, and a starting gear A plate-like portion 4452e is provided mainly on the front side of the teeth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the tooth width of the divided gear teeth 4452b constituted by the starting gear teeth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2 is maximum at the starting gear teeth 4452b1, and the tooth width of the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2 is the start The distance from the gear teeth 4452b1 is shortened stepwise based on the start gear teeth 4452b1.

  The plate-like portion 4452e is formed in such a manner as to project from the bottom of the divided gear teeth 4452b to the same position as the tip circle in a front view and is covered on the front side of the divided gear teeth 4452b. The plate-like portion 4452e is formed in such a manner as to draw a smooth curve in a bottom view according to the formation position of the front side surface of the divided gear teeth 4452b (see FIG. 31 (b)).

  Here, it is considered that the front side surfaces of the divided gear teeth 4452b are formed on the same plane, and the plate-like portion 4452e is also formed on the plane. In this case, the disk portion 452c and the plate portion 4452e are provided to increase the allowance of the positional shift of the reverse gear 4453 in the axial direction of the double layer gear 4452 at the start of the engagement of the reverse gear 4453 and the double layer gear 4452. The axial position of the reverse gear 4453 during rotation can not be determined. On the other hand, in order to accurately determine the axial position of the reverse gear 4453 during rotation, the reverse gear 4453 is slightly misaligned in the axial direction at the start of meshing, so that the reverse gear 4453 is the outer periphery of the plate portion 4452e. It abuts against the surface, and there is a possibility that a meshing failure may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a positional shift (upward in FIG. 31B) in the axial direction that may occur before the reverse gear 4453 is engaged with the double-layer gear 4452 is a meshing start position. The maximum allowable near the starting gear tooth 4452b1 is.

  Further, the plate-like portion 4452e is formed in a manner of drawing a smooth curve in which the distance to the disc portion 452c is shortened as the plate-like portion 4452e is separated from the starting gear teeth 4452b1 in bottom view (see FIG. 31B). Therefore, by the reverse gear 4453 being in contact with the plate-like portion 4452e, the axial position of the reverse gear 4453 can be corrected more largely as the meshing progresses (moving it downward in FIG. 31 (b)). Can) Therefore, it is possible to correct the positional deviation in the axial direction when the double-layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 mesh with each other as the meshing progresses.

  32 (a) is a front view of the reversing gear 4453, FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 4453, and FIG. 32 (c) is a view in the arrow XXXIIc direction of FIG. 32 (a). It is a partial side view of reversal gear 4453.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the reversing gear 4453 is formed between a pair of starting gear teeth 4453b1 disposed adjacent to the pair of arc-shaped concave portions 453c and a region sandwiched by the starting gear teeth 4453b1. And gear teeth 4453b2 mainly.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the reversing gear 4453 is formed in such a manner that the width of the starting gear teeth 4453b1 is maximized and the width of the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 is shortened as the distance from the starting gear teeth 4453b1 increases. . The degree of shortening (the inclination of the line connecting the upper ends of the gear teeth in FIG. 32B) is the degree of shortening of the tooth width of the divided gear teeth 4452b of the double-layer gear 4452 (each gear tooth in FIG. 31B). The slope of the line connecting the upper ends of) is formed gently.

  As shown in FIG. 32C, each gear tooth 4453b1 453b2 of the reverse gear 4453 is an end face in the width direction except for the intermediate gear tooth 4453b2 which is formed farthest from the pair of engagement projecting receiving portions 453d. (The upper end face in FIG. 32 (b)) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the engagement projecting receiving portion side. As a result, the positional deviation can be corrected more rapidly while maintaining a large allowable amount of relative positional deviation in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reverse gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452.

  That is, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 453b2 of the reverse gear 4453 are engaged with the double-layer gear 4452, the gear teeth 4453b1 and 453b2 are on the engagement protrusion receiving side (the side with the shortest tooth width, FIG. 32C) Start to be engaged from the right side). Therefore, for example, compared with the case where the dimensions in the tooth width direction of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 are constant on the longest tooth width side (left side in FIG. 32 (c)), A large space (play) between the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large allowable amount of positional deviation in the axial direction when the reverse gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 start meshing.

  On the other hand, when meshing between each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 of the reverse gear 4453 and the double layer gear 4452 progresses, the longest width side (left side in FIG. 32C) of each gear tooth 4453b1, 453b2 is the double layer gear 4452. It enters into the back side (downward in FIG. 31B) of the plate-like portion 4452e. Thus, for example, the teeth are disengaged (each of the teeth is disjointed as compared to the case where the dimension in the tooth width direction of each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 is constant on the shortest tooth width side (right side in FIG. 32C). At the time of escape), the gap (play) between the plate-like portion 4452e immediately before and the gear teeth 4453b1 and 453b2 can be reduced.

  Therefore, when each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 meshes with the double-layer gear 4452, between the plate portion 4452e and each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 from the start of meshing for each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 to the mesh release. The interval (play) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to more rapidly correct the misalignment between the reverse gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the inclination (see FIG. 31B) of the plate portion 4452e is formed in the opposite direction to the inclination (see FIG. 32C) of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 453b2 of the reverse gear 4453. It is possible to improve the effect of more rapidly correcting the positional deviation while holding a large allowable amount of positional deviation in the axial direction at the start of meshing of the reverse gear 4453 and the double-layer gear 4452 described above.

  The end face in the width direction of the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 (the upper end face in FIG. 32B) formed farthest from the pair of engaging projecting receiving portions 453d is formed in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the reversing gear 4453. Ru.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35, a second gear group 5450 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the double-layer gear 452 is formed only of a single resin material has been described, but in the double-layer gear 5452 in the fifth embodiment, the magnetic material is embedded inside the starting gear teeth 5452b1. Ru. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 33 is a front view of the double-layer gear 5452. As shown in FIG. 33, in the two-layer gear 5452, the embedding hole 5452g is bored in the starting gear teeth 5452b1 along the direction parallel to the rotation axis, and the embedding member 5452h is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g.

  The embedded hole 5452g is formed in a bottomed hole shape having a circular cross-sectional diameter, and the embedded member 5452h is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the embedded hole 5452g. Thereby, the embedding member 5452 h is fitted and fixed to the embedding hole 5452 g.

  The embedded member 5452 h is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the S pole and the N pole are divided into two in a plane along the axis. In FIGS. 33 to 35, the black-painted side of the embedding member 5452h is formed of the N pole, and the opposite side thereof is formed of the S pole.

  FIG. 34 is a partial front view of second gear group 5450. FIG. FIG. 34 shows a state immediately before the start gear teeth 5452b1 of the double-layer gear 5452 abuts on the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 5453. Further, the disc portion 452c of the double-layer gear 5452, the gear teeth 452a, and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the reversing gear 5453, the embedding hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 along the direction parallel to the axis, and the embedding member 5453g is embedded in the embedding hole 5453f. Thereby, the embedding member 5453g is fitted and fixed to the embedding hole 5453f.

  The embedded member 5453g is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the S pole and the N pole are divided into two in a plane along the axis.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the plane dividing the magnetic pole into two is formed along the radial direction and is a plane passing through the axis, and the starting gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1 are embedded with the opposite poles facing each other. That is, an N pole is formed on the side (upper side in FIG. 34) of the starting gear teeth 5452b1 facing the starting gear teeth 5453b1 at the time of tooth engagement, and a side facing the starting gear teeth 5452b1 at the time of tooth engagement (FIG. 34 lower). The south pole is formed on the side). As a result, in the meshing between the double-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453, a magnetic force is generated which attracts the meshing gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1.

  That is, since the distance between the embedding members 5452h and 5453g is reduced as the double-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 34 from the state shown in FIG. 34, the magnetic force generated between them increases and the starting gear teeth 5453b1 are the starting gear teeth. It is attracted to 5452b1. As a result, the reversing gear 5453 is pulled and rotated by the magnetic force before the start gear teeth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 and the engagement projecting portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453 contact each other. Therefore, as compared with the case where the starting gear teeth 5452b1 abut on the reverse gear 5453 in a stationary state, it is possible to relieve the impact at the time of contact and the load received by the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 at the time of contact.

  FIG. 35 is a partial front view of second gear group 5450. FIG. 35 shows a state in which the double-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 35 by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. Further, the disc portion 452c of the double-layer gear 5452, the gear teeth 452a, and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 35, a gap is formed between the double-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 in front of the double-layer gear 5452 in the rotational direction. Thus, not only at the start of the contact between the double-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 but also during the rotation of the double-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 by the engagement, the load applied to the engagement protrusion-like receiving portion 453 d Can be suppressed. Therefore, the strength required for the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453 d can be reduced, and the design freedom of the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453 d can be improved.

  Next, a second gear group 6450 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is integrally formed has been described, but the two-layer gear 6452 in the sixth embodiment is different from the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 while the starting gear teeth 452b1 are omitted. It comprises a body shaped gear tooth member 6452g. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a front exploded perspective view of the double-layer gear 6452. Note that FIG. 36 shows the deformed gear tooth member 6452g removed from the disc portion 452c. In the present embodiment, since the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is formed of a metal material such as iron, it is a portion other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g of the double layer gear 6452 and compared to a portion integrally formed of a resin material. The rigidity of the irregular gear tooth member 6452g is increased. In addition, by partially forming a metal material, the weight can be reduced as compared to the case where the entire two-layer gear 6452 is formed of a metal material, and the driving force required to rotate the two-layer gear 6452 can be suppressed. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the double-layer gear 6452 has a pair of deformed gear tooth members 6452g and an insertion hole 6452c1 through which the deformed gear tooth members 6452g are inserted and which is formed in the disk portion 452c. A gear tooth side notch 6452b5 which is a notch formed between the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 and in which the gear tooth main portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched, and a sliding wall portion 452d A sliding part notch 6452d1 into which the sliding receiving part 6452g3 of the irregular gear tooth member 6452g is inserted, and an L-shaped wedge formed on both ends of the sliding wall part 452d. And a mold receiving portion 6452 d 2.

  The deformed gear tooth member 6452g has a gear tooth main body 6452g1 having a shape in which the starting gear tooth 452b1 in the first embodiment is extended to the tooth bottom side, and a back surface from the end opposite to the tooth tip of the gear tooth main body 6452g1. A cylindrical insertion pin 6452g2 provided to project on the side, a slide receiving portion 6452g3 whose side surface forms a part of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37), and a gear tooth main body 6452g1 A connecting portion 6452g4 connecting the receiving portion 6452g3 is mainly provided.

  The gear tooth main body 6452g1 is formed such that the tooth thickness of the portion sandwiched by the gear tooth side notch 6452b5 is equal to or slightly larger than the size of the gear tooth side notch 6452b5. Thereby, the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is held by the gear tooth side notch 6452b5 in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

  The slide receiving portion 6452g3 is formed in such a manner that the outer peripheral surface is smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37). The outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 is disposed opposite to the recessed bottom wall portion 452e at a slight distance in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 37), the insertion pin 6452g2 is inserted into the insertion hole 6452c1 and the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched by the gear tooth side notch 6452b5. Further, the connecting portion 6452g4 is disposed opposite to the recessed bottom wall portion 452e of the second recessed portion 452b4 with a slight gap, and the inner peripheral side of the slide receiving portion 6452g3 abuts on the wedge-shaped receiving portion 6452d2. As a result, the gear tooth main body 6452g1 is brought into contact with the reverse gear 453, so that the amount of rotation about the insertion hole 6452c1 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the double-layer gear 6452 and the reversing gear 453. In FIG. 37, a state in which the gear tooth main body 6452g1 of the irregular gear tooth member 6452g abuts on the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453 is illustrated, and the disk 452c is illustrated by an imaginary line. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the load which is applied from the reverse gear 453 by the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g can be received by the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453 d of the reverse gear 453.

  That is, even if the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is formed of a metal material, the portion supporting the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is formed of a resin material. Further, the two-layer gear 6452 is formed to have a substantially constant radial thickness in order to prevent generation of a sink at the time of molding, and therefore the rigidity is not sufficient. Therefore, when the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is moved (rotated around the insertion hole 6452c1) by the load generated when the two-layer gear 6452 and the reverse gear 453 abut, pressing force from the deformed gear tooth member 6452g There is a risk that portions other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g (such as the dent bottom wall portion 452e) that receives the part may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g starts to move in the direction of filling a slight gap formed between the outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 and the depressed bottom wall portion 452e (with the insertion hole 6452c1 as an axis) When it starts to be rotated), the slide receiving portion 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is pressed against the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the reversing gear 453. The arcuate recess 453c is a portion with a sufficient radial thickness and high rigidity.

  As a result, it is possible for the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453 to receive the load that the differential gear tooth member 6452g is applied from the reverse gear 453, and it is a portion of the two-layer gear 6452 other than the differential gear tooth member 6452g. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the part of (the hollow bottom wall 452e and the like). Further, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g can be supported by using the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the reverse gear 453.

  Next, a composite operation unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the crescent member 460 rotates is limited to one is described. However, the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment is configured when the crescent member 460 rotates. The position of the slide member 420 can be formed in at least two ways. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  38 (a) to 38 (c) are rear views of the double-layer gear 7452. FIG. In FIG. 38A, the stationary state in which the rotation of the double-layer gear 7452 is stopped is illustrated, and in FIG. 38B, the first rotation where the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 is lower than the boundary speed Vb. A state in which the speed is V1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 38C, a state in which the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is the second rotation speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb is illustrated.

  In order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the gear teeth 452 a and the disc portion 452 c is omitted. This is the same in the subsequent drawings. Further, the boundary speed Vb means the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 when the protruding gear member 7452 e is switched from the inset state to the in-out state.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the double-layer gear 7452 is formed with a guide groove 7452 d which is a groove having a rectangular cross section formed radially outward from the rotation axis, and a width slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 7452 d. And a biasing spring 7452f for connecting the projecting gear member 7452e and the rotation shaft of the double-layer gear 7452. The projecting gear member 7452e has a tip end formed in a gear tooth shape.

  The guide grooves 7452 d are formed at three locations so as to divide the outer periphery of the two-layer gear 7452 in the circumferential direction into three equal parts, and the projecting gear members 7452 e and the biasing springs 7452 f are arranged in the respective guide grooves 7452 d. Further, intermediate gear teeth 452 b 2 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 7452 connecting the guide grooves 7452 d.

  The protruding gear members 7452e are each formed of the same mass as each protruding gear member 7452e1 to 7452e3, and each biasing spring 7452f is formed with the same spring constant.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, in the stopped state of the double-layer gear 7452, the protruding gear member 7452e is sunk closer to the rotation shaft than the surface in which the bottom of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 is continuous. At this time, the incorrect spring 7452f has a natural length.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 lower than the boundary speed Vb, it is attempted to move the protruding gear member 7452e radially outward of the double-layer gear 7452 Power is generated. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f are balanced. In the extended state, the protruding gear member 7452e is positioned closer to the rotation shaft than the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected (immersion state).

  Therefore, as described later, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1, the double-layer gear 7452 is not meshed with the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 42). That is, the double gear 7452 idles relative to the reverse gear 7453.

  As shown in FIG. 38C, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb, it is attempted to move the protruding gear member 7452e radially outward of the double-layer gear 7452 Power is generated. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f are balanced. In the extended state, the protruding gear member 7452e protrudes outward in the radial direction with respect to the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (an extended state).

  Therefore, as described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gear 7452 abuts on the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39). The layer gear 7452 starts meshing with the reversing gear 7453.

  That is, whether the double-layer gear 7452 starts meshing with the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39) by setting the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 to a high speed or a low speed with respect to the boundary speed Vb It can be selected. Therefore, by changing the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 in the middle of rotation (by changing the moving speed of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40) in the middle of movement), the crescent member 460 (see FIG. 40) A plurality of variations of the arrangement of the slide member 420 can be prepared when the is rotated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44, variations of the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the meniscal member 460 starts to be rotated will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, the case (first speed pattern) will be described in which the main driving gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 immediately after the start of the movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position.

  39 (a) to 39 (e) are back views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in time series, and FIGS. 40 (b), FIG. 41 (a) and FIG. 41 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 7400 in which the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the crescent member 460 are illustrated in time series. In order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 39, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown, and in FIGS. 40 and 41, the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are not shown.

  39 (a) and 40 (a), 39 (b) and 40 (b), 39 (c) and 41 (a), and 39 (d) and 41 (b). Are respectively views of approximately the same point, and are in correspondence with each other. Further, in FIG. 39, the rotational direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is illustrated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. 39, the arc-shaped recess 453c is circumscribed by a circle connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452. Are formed in the following manner.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2 immediately after the start of the movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40A), and the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount. The first projecting gear member 7452e1 abuts on the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B). As a result, the reverse gear 7453 starts to rotate, and the crescent member 460 starts to change its attitude (see FIG. 40B).

  After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, so that the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is continued and the posture change of the crescent member 460 (See FIGS. 39 (c) and 41 (a)).

  After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 7453 mesh with each other, the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reverse gear 7453 is again double-layer gear 7452 by rotation of the double-layer gear 7452. And rotation of the reverse gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the meniscal member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 41 (b)).

  Thereafter, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding movement (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped by stopping the slide member 420 (see FIG. 39E). Thereafter, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved radially inward of the two-layer gear 7452 by the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f.

  Here, when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated from the state of FIG. 39D to the state of FIG. 39E, the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 are in contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d. There is a risk that the double-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 contact with each other again.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an arc-shaped chamfered portion 7453e is formed at one end (the upper end in FIG. 39E) of the engagement protruding receiving portion 453d.

  When the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 abut on the chamfered portion 7453e, a force directed radially inward of the two-layer gear 7452 is exerted on the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1. As a result, before the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 mesh with the reverse gear 745, the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 can be in the retracted state. Therefore, the double layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be prevented from meshing again.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 42 to 44, immediately after the start of the movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position, the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 and the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated The case (second speed pattern) in which rotation is performed at the speed V2 (rotational speed V is changed) will be described.

  42 (a) to 42 (e) are back views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in time series, and FIGS. 43 (b), FIG. 44 (a) and FIG. 44 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 7400 illustrating the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the crescent member 460 in time series. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown, and in FIGS. 43 and 44, the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are not shown.

  42 (a) and FIGS. 40 (a), 42 (b) and 43 (a), 42 (c) and 43 (b), 42 (d) and 44 (a). And FIG. 42 (e) and FIG. 44 (b) are views of substantially the same point, respectively, corresponding to each other. Also, in FIG. 42, the rotational direction of the double-layer gear 7452 is illustrated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. 42 (a), the circular concave portion 453c is a circle connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452. It is formed in a manner circumscribed to

  As shown in FIG. 42A, since the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotational speed V1 immediately after the start of the movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40A), the projecting gear member 7452e is in the retracted state. Form.

  Therefore, even if the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is not in contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 7453. Therefore, the meshing between the double-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 is It does not start (see FIG. 42 (b)). Thereby, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the crescent member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43A).

  The rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is changed to the second rotational speed V2 until the two-layer gear 7452 continues to rotate and the second projecting gear member 7452e2 approaches the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453 Be done. As a result, the protruding gear member 7452e forms an extended state (see FIG. 42C), and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 abuts on the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d, whereby the reverse gear 7453 is rotated. At the same time, the crescent member 460 begins to change its posture (see FIG. 43 (b)).

  After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, so that the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is continued and the posture change of the crescent member 460 (See FIGS. 42 (d) and 44 (a)).

  After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 7453 mesh with each other, the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reverse gear 7453 is again double-layer gear 7452 by rotation of the double-layer gear 7452. (See FIG. 42 (e)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the meniscal member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 44 (b)).

  Thereafter, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 slides (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped by stopping the slide member 420.

  Since the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 and the moving speed of the slide member 420 are in a proportional relationship, changing the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is easy by changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 472 Can be done.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the meniscal member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. be able to. That is, compared with the case where the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 from the start of rotation (see FIGS. 39 to 41), the first rotation speed V1 changes to the second rotation speed V2 during the rotation. If it is changed (see FIG. 42 to FIG. 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the crescent member 460 rotates can be brought closer to the center side (vertical side in the vertical direction) (FIG. 40 (b) and FIG. 43 (b)). Thereby, the variation of the presentation can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, representative examples of the above-described first velocity pattern and second velocity pattern will be described. FIG. 45 is a graph showing a change in speed of the double-layer gear 7452. In FIG. 45, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the extended position (P = Pmax), and the vertical axis indicates the slide of the slide member 420. The rotational speed V of the double layer gear 7452 which is rotated at the time of movement is shown.

  In the horizontal axis of FIG. 45, the first position P1 means a position where the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is first disposed to face the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B), and the second position P2 is a position. 42 (c) means the position where the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is initially disposed opposite to the reverse gear 7453. The solid line indicates the above-described first velocity pattern, and the broken line indicates the above-described second velocity pattern. Indicated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the first speed pattern, the crescent member 460 starts to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the second speed pattern, the crescent member 460 starts to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

  That is, by changing the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 during the slide movement of the slide member 420, it is possible to change the position of the slide member 420 when the posture change of the crescent member 460 starts to be changed. Therefore, variations in the effects of the slide member 420 and the meniscal member 460 can be increased.

  Next, a composite operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the crescent member 460 rotates is changed by changing the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 in the middle of rotation has been described. The combined operation unit 8400 is formed so that the position of the slide member 420 when the crescent member 460 rotates can be changed while maintaining the rotational speed of the double-layer gear 8452 at the same speed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are rear views of the double-layer gear 8452. FIG. 46 (a) shows that the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, and FIG. 46 (b) shows that the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the joint rotational speed V4. Be done. The stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 is stopped is the same as that shown in FIG.

  In order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the gear teeth 452 a and the disc portion 452 c is omitted. This is the same in the subsequent drawings. Further, the separation rotational speed V3 means the rotational speed at which the first projecting gear member 7452e1 forms the retracted state while the second projecting gear member 7452e2 forms the overhanging state, and the joint rotational speed V4 This means the rotational speed at which the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 together form an extended state.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the projecting gear members 7452e are moved radially outward of the double-layer gear 8452 by different projecting amounts. (The moving amount of at least the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is larger than that of the first protruding gear member 7452e1).

  In the present embodiment, the spring constants of the biasing springs 8452f, which connect the protruding gear members 7452e and the rotation shaft of the double-layer gear 7452, are formed differently. That is, the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1 connecting the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the rotation axis of the double-layer gear 8452 is the first connecting the second protruding gear member 7452e2 and the rotation axis of the double-layer gear 8452 The spring constant of the second biasing spring 8452f2 is made larger. The spring constant of the third biasing spring 8452f3 is larger than the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is positioned closer to the rotation shaft than the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 The second projecting gear member 7452e2 is projected radially outward of the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected (projected state).

  Therefore, as described later, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the two-layer gear 8452 is not engaged with the reversing gear 7453 at the first projecting gear member 7452e1, and the second projecting gear It is meshed with the reversing gear 7453 by a member 7452e2.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotation speed V4, a force is generated to move the protruding gear member 7452e radially outward of the double-layer gear 8452. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the biasing force of the biasing spring 8452f are balanced. In the extended state, at least the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 are extended radially outward of the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in a row (the extended state).

  Therefore, when the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotation speed V4, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 of the projecting gear members 7452e of the double-layer gear 8452 abuts on the reverse gear 7453 to make the double-layer gear 7452 Begins to be engaged with the reversing gear 7453.

  The operations of the two-layer gear 8452, the reversing gear 7453, and the slide member 420 when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the same rotational speed V4 are the same as the operations illustrated in FIGS. 39 to 41. I omit explanation.

  47 (a) to 47 (e) are rear views of the double-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the double-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 in time series. In the description of FIG. 47, FIG. 40, FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 are appropriately referred to, and in FIG. 47, the illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disc portion 452c is omitted for ease of understanding.

  47 (a) and FIGS. 40 (a), 47 (b), 43 (a), 47 (c) and 43 (b), FIGS. 47 (d) and 44 (a). And FIG. 47 (e) and FIG. 44 (b) are views of substantially the same point, respectively, corresponding to each other. Also, in FIG. 47, the rotational directions of the double-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 are illustrated by arrows, and as shown in FIG. 47, the arcuate recess 453c connects the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452. It is formed in a manner circumscribed to a circle.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), since the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3 immediately after the start of the movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)), the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is in the retracted state And the second projecting gear member 7452e2 forms an overhanging state.

  Therefore, even if the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is not in contact with the engagement protruding receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 7453. Therefore, the meshing between the double-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 is It does not start (see FIG. 47 (b)). Thereby, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the crescent member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43A).

  The two-layer gear 8452 continues to rotate at the separation rotational speed V3 and the second projecting gear member 7452e2 abuts on the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d, whereby the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate and the semilunar member 460 takes a posture It starts to change (see FIG. 43 (b)).

  After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, so that the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is continued and the posture change of the crescent member 460 (See FIG. 47 (d) and FIG. 44 (a)).

  After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 7453 mesh with each other, the two-layer gear 8452 is further rotated to reciprocate the arcuate recess 453c of the reverse gear 7453 into the double-layer gear 8452 (See FIG. 47 (e)), and the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped and the posture of the crescent member 460 is fixed (see FIG. 44 (b)).

  Thereafter, the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated until the slide member 420 slides (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped by stopping the slide member 420.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the meniscal member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. It does not require a speed change during the sliding movement of the slide member 420.

  That is, compared with the case where the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the constant rotational speed V4 (see FIGS. 40 and 41), the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the constant rotational speed V3 (FIG. 43). And FIG. 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the crescent member 460 rotates can be brought closer to the center side (vertical side in the vertical direction) (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 43 (b)). Thereby, the variation of the presentation can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the above-described separated rotation speed V3 and the common rotation speed V4 will be described as a graph. FIG. 48 is a graph showing the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452. In FIG. 48, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the extended position (P = Pmax) of the slide member 420, and the vertical axis indicates the slide member 420. The rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 which is rotated at the time of sliding movement of

  In the horizontal axis of FIG. 48, the first position P1 means a position where the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is first disposed to face the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B), and the second position P2 is a position. The second projecting gear member 7452e2 is located at a position where it is first disposed opposite to the reversing gear 7453 (FIG. 42C).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the common rotation speed V4, the meniscus member 460 starts to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotational speed V3, the crescent member 460 starts to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

  That is, if two types of slide movement speeds of the slide member 420 are set, the slide member 420 starts to change the posture of the meniscal member 460 without changing the slide movement speed of the slide member 420 during movement. The position of can be changed. Therefore, variations in the effects of the slide member 420 and the meniscal member 460 can be increased.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the claw members 463 of the crescent member 460 move due to the movement of the slide rack 442 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the locking pin is disposed in a rotational locus in which the drive lever 467 is rotated by rotation of the crescent member 460, and the crescent member 460 and the drive lever are fixed by locking the drive lever 467 to the locking pin. There may be a mode in which a rotation angle difference occurs between the two, and the claw member 463 is moved. In this case, the rotation of the crescent member 460 and the movement of the claw member 463 can be interlocked.

  Although the case where the notch 422d of the slide member 420 is formed in an arc shape has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be cut in a rectangular shape in a direction away from the drive gear 473. Thus, the design freedom of the notched portion 422d can be improved, and the material necessary for the slide member 420 can be reduced.

  Although the case where the shape which followed the tooth tip of drive gear 473 was approximately circle was explained by each above-mentioned embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the drive gear 473 may be divided into four in the circumferential direction, and gear teeth may have different teeth for each of the divided parts. In this case, by mounting the drive gear 473 with the gear teeth with the short teeth directed toward the receiving leg 422, the size required for the notch 422d of the receiving leg 422 for passing the driving gear 473 is required. Can be reduced. On the other hand, the transmission of the driving force to the receiving leg 422 can be secured at the portion where the gear teeth of the gear teeth are long. In addition, in the divided part mentioned above, there may be a part in which a gear tooth is not formed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the drive gear 473 is attached and removed through the notches 422 d formed in the pair of the receiving legs 422 opposed to each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cutaway portion 422d may not be formed in the receiving leg 422, and the receiving leg 422 may be movable in a direction away from each other (a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction). In this case, while the drive gear 473 can not be removed when the pair of the receiving legs 422 are disposed close to each other, the driving gear 473 can be removed when the pair of the receiving legs 422 are disposed at a distance. can do.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedding member 5452 h made of a magnetic material is embedded in the embedding hole 5452 g of the two-layer gear 5452 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a mode may be used in which the periphery of the start gear teeth 5452b1 of the double-layer gear 5452 is covered with a magnetic material. As a result, the magnetic material can be disposed outside the starting gear teeth 5452b1, whereby the distance between the reverse gear 5453 and the magnetic material can be reduced, and the double layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 work at the start of meshing. The magnetic force can be made more powerful.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedding hole 5453f is bored in the starting gear teeth 5453b1 of the reversing gear 5453 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the embedding hole 5453f may be formed in the engagement protrusion receiving portion 453d and the embedding member 5453g may be embedded. In this case, the embedding members 5452 h and 5453 g are embedded so that the magnetic force of the embedding member 5453 g and the magnetic force of the embedding member 5452 h embedded in the two-layer gear 5452 repel each other, thereby reversing the two-layer gear 5452. The impact at the time of contact of the gear 5453 can be alleviated. That is, before the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the double-layer gear 5452 are abutted against the engagement projecting receiving portions 453d of the reversing gear 5453, the reversing magnetic force rotates the reversing gear 5453 away from the starting gear teeth 5452b1. Can. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear teeth 5452b1 can be improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the mass of each protruding gear member 7452e is equal to each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each projecting gear member 7452e may be formed to have a different mass, and the spring constant of the biasing spring 7452f that biases the projecting gear member 7452e having a larger mass may be formed larger. Thereby, the difference in the extension of the protruding gear member 7452e due to the size of the mass can be alleviated by the size of the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f.

  In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear members 7452e of the double-layer gears 7452 and 8452 are formed so as to be movable, so that the timing of abutment of the double-layer gears 7452 and 8452 with the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reverse gear 7453 may be formed so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the double-layer gear 7452, 8452. In this case, the reversing gears 7453 can be separated from the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 to form a state in which they are not in contact with each other, while the reversing gears 7453 can be in contact with each other by approaching the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 It can be done. Therefore, even when the movable protruding gear member 7452e is not required, the timing of abutment of the double-layer gears 7452 and 8452 with the reversing gear 7453 can be changed.

  In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear members 7452e of the double-layer gears 7452 and 8452 are formed so as to be movable, so that the timing of abutment of the double-layer gears 7452 and 8452 with the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 may be capable of forming a first state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are not engaged and a second state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are engaged. In this case, while the driving force is not transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 in the first state, the driving force can be transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 in the second state. Therefore, even when the movable protruding gear member 7452e is not required, the timing at which the reverse gear 7453 starts operation can be changed.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, the mass of each projecting gear member 7452e is equal to each other, and the spring constant of each biasing spring 8452f is different. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spring constant of each biasing spring 8452f may be the same, and the mass of each protruding gear member 7452e may be different. This makes it possible to adjust the amount of projection of each protruding gear member 7452e more easily than adjusting the spring constant.

  Although the case where the drive gear 473 is pivotally supported at one point on the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, while a plurality of pins are protrusively provided at the end of the shaft support member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 472, a plurality of fitting portions are formed in which the plurality of pins are fitted in the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473 The shaft support member and the drive gear 473 may be engaged at a plurality of points. In this case, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be maintained by hooking the pin on the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction, so that the fitting between the drive gear 473 and the plurality of pins is loosely formed. can do.

  As a result, the force required to separate the drive motor 472 and the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473 can be reduced, so that the front side wall portion 422 c of the receiving leg 422 is deformed or excessive stress is generated on the drive motor 472. It can be prevented from being added.

<First control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 49 to FIG. 121, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the above-described embodiments, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted. The present control example is different from the above-described embodiments in which the special winning opening 65a is opened and closed at the time of big hit, and is different in that the entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened and closed at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this control example, the ball entry restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened and closed at the time of the big hit, but is not limited thereto. Depending on the type of the big hit, the specific winning opening 65a may be opened, Whether or not the entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened or closed may be changed, or may be changed for each round in one jackpot. As a result, the variation of the game is increased, and the player's interest can be improved.

  First, the specific winning device 650 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. FIG. FIG. 49 (a) is a front perspective view of the specific winning device 650, and FIG. 49 (b) is a rear perspective view of the specific winning device 650. FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the specific winning device 650 disassembled, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the specific winning device 650 disassembled. Furthermore, FIG. 52 is a front view and a side sectional view of the specific winning device 650. In FIG. 52, a state in which the front cover body 651 is removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the specific winning device 650 includes a front cover 651, a base member 652, and a back cover 655. The front cover 651 and the rear cover 655 are respectively fastened by screws from the rear side of the base member 652, the front cover 651 is on the front side of the base member 652, and the rear cover 655 is on the rear side of the base member 652. It is fit to become. As a result, an area in which the gaming balls can flow down is formed inside the specific winning device 650. Further, the base member 652 is attached to the game board 13 in a state of being inserted into an opening hole processed by a router. Thereby, the specific winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, a plurality of sensors for detecting that the game ball has flowed down are provided inside the specific winning device 650, and based on the detection results of those sensors, effects during the big hit game Is configured to change.

  Details of the specific winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view in which the specific winning device 650 is disassembled into a front cover 651, a base member 652, and a back cover 655. FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the specific winning device 650 in the same manner as FIG. 52 (a) is a front view of the specific winning device 650 with the front cover removed, and FIG. 52 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LIIb-LIIb of FIG. 52 (a), and FIG. FIG. 52A is a cross-sectional view taken along line LIIc-LIIc of FIG.

  The front cover body 651 is provided with a front cover and an outer wall standing from the outer edge thereof, and is formed of a light transmitting material in a box shape whose one surface side (the back side in FIG. 50) is open. In the upper right and upper left central portions of the outer wall portion, openings having a width allowing game balls to flow down are provided. Thereby, when the front cover body 651 and the base member 652 are fitted, the opening on the upper right side becomes an entrance 651a through which gaming balls can flow into the inside of the specific winning device 650, and the opening on the left central part is The game ball inside the specific winning device 650 becomes an outlet portion 652c which can flow outward. In addition, a guiding wall is formed from the opening on the upper right side to the central part, and the gaming ball having entered the entrance 651a is configured to be guided to a first specified winning opening 650a described later. In addition, an entrance sensor 900a is disposed at the entrance portion 651a, and an exit sensor 900c is disposed at the exit portion 652c, so that it is possible to detect gaming balls having passed through each.

  A second winning opening is provided at the upper portion of the base member 652, and a first specific winning opening 650a is formed at the lower right portion, and a second specific winning opening 650b is formed at the lower left portion projecting to the front and back sides. ing. A first ball entry sensor 652a and a second ball entry sensor 652b are disposed above the first specified winning hole 650a and the second specified winning hole 650b, respectively. Be done. Above the first ball entry sensor 652a and the second ball entry sensor 652b, a ball entry restricting plate 654 that can slide in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. By sliding the ball entry restricting plate, the game ball can be changed into the state in which the game ball can enter the ball and the state in which it can not enter the ball in the first specified winning hole 650a or the second specified winning hole 650b.

  A bypass channel 653 is provided in the vicinity of the upper portion of the ball entry restricting plate 654 and between the first specific winning hole 650a and the second specific winning hole 650b. The gaming ball having entered the entrance portion 651 a of the specific winning device 650 first flows down to a position above the first specific winning opening 650 a and in front of the bypass flow path 653. Here, when the ball entry restriction plate 654 is open (sliding back), the gaming ball enters the first specified winning hole 650a, while the ball entry restriction plate 654 is closed. When (sliding to the front), the gaming ball flows down to the bypass channel 653. Note that a bypass sensor 900 b is provided at the upstream side inlet portion 653 a of the bypass flow channel 653, and it is possible to detect passing gaming balls.

  The gaming balls having flowed down the bypass flow path 653 flow downward above the second specified winning opening 650b and before the outlet portion 652c. Here, when the ball entry restriction plate 654 is open (sliding back), the gaming ball enters the second specified winning hole 650b, while the ball entry restriction plate 654 is closed. When (sliding to the front), the gaming ball flows down from the exit portion 652 c to the outside of the specific winning device 650.

  Here, the first specified winning hole 650a and the second specified winning hole 650b are both paid out based on the winnings (game balls). That is, even if it is a game ball that entered the specified winning opening 650 at the timing when the entry restriction plate 654 is closed and did not enter the first specified winning opening 650a, it enters after passing the bypass channel 653. If it is the timing at which the ball regulating plate 654 is opened, the player enters the second specified winning opening 650b, and the winning balls are paid out based on the winning. Therefore, based on the gaming ball having entered the specific winning device 650, payout of the winning balls can be facilitated.

  The bypass flow path 653 is formed on the front and back sides of the base member 652 so that the game balls meander and flow downward. As a result, compared to the case where the game balls are formed to flow down without meandering, the path length of the bypass flow path can be made longer, so the time for the game balls to flow down the bypass flow path can be lengthened. Therefore, even when the timing at which the ball entry restricting plate 654 opens is late, it is possible for the gaming ball having passed the bypass flow passage 653 to enter the second specified winning hole 650b.

  Although the details will be described later, the game ball having passed the bypass flow path 653 is determined by the opening / closing pattern of the ball entry restricting plate 654 according to the time for the game ball to pass through the bypass path 653. It is possible to define an opening and closing pattern that is easy to enter the ball and an opening and closing pattern that is difficult to enter the ball. In addition, if the path length of the bypass path 653 can be adjusted, it can be adjusted whether it is easy for the gaming ball having passed the bypass flow path 653 to enter the second specified winning hole 650b. The time for which the detour path 653 passes is not limited to the path length, but may be adjusted by changing the friction coefficient of the road surface on which the game balls flow down (for example, using a non-slippery material).

  A protrusion 652 d is formed on the upper part of the second winning opening 640, and an electric part 640 a is disposed on the left and right. As a result, the game ball can enter the second winning opening 640 only when the electric role product 640 a is opened. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second winning opening 640 may be allowed to enter the ball even if the motorized accessory 640a is not opened without forming the protrusion 652d.

  The back cover body 655 is formed with a discharge flow path through which the game balls entered into the second winning opening 640, the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b described above flow down, and the electric bonus 640a. And a variable solenoid 670 for varying the ball entry restricting plate 654.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 53 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 53 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of the numbers "0" to "9". In addition, each main symbol may be displayed together with numbers and symbols.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (refer to FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Moreover, if it is "big hit B", the variable display in which the main symbol to which "0,2,4,6,8" which is an even number is added aligns is performed. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the SW effect and the background change effect suggesting (precedent) that the possibility of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is high. This may be performed, in which case the display area in which the variable display is performed may be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if aligned with the combination of big hit symbols (in this control example, the combination of the same main symbols) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

  In the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this control example) performs a predetermined action, sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out and the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times. The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In this control example, ball entry to the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to four times at the maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is not limited to four times, three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, the opening / closing pattern of the ball entry restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 and the ball entry timing of the game ball will be described. FIG. 54 is a schematic view schematically showing the ball entering timing in the opening / closing operation of the ball entering regulating plate 654. As shown in FIG. The upper part of FIG. 54 shows the open / close state of the ball entry restricting plate 654, and the middle part shows the timing when the launched gaming ball enters the entrance part 651a of the specified winning device 650, The lower part shows the timing at which the game ball which has flowed into the bypass channel without entering the first specified winning hole 650a finishes flowing down the bypass channel.

  The timing at which the ball entry restricting plate 654 is open is the timing at which the launched gaming ball enters the first specified winning opening 650a (first ball entry timing). On the other hand, the timing at which the ball entry restricted version 654 is closed is the timing at which the launched gaming ball does not enter the first specified winning opening 650a, and the gaming ball which has flowed down the bypass channel 653 is the second specified winning opening 650b. There is a timing of entering the ball (second entering timing) and a timing of not flowing into the second specified winning hole 650b and flowing downward from the exit portion 652c (exit passing timing).

  The second ball entry timing and the exit passage timing are determined by whether or not the ball entry restricting plate 654 is open at the timing when the gaming ball finishes flowing down the detour path 653. In FIG. 54, it is the second entering timing after the first entering timing, and the game ball fired at this timing does not enter the first specified winning opening 650a, and the bypass flow path 653 It will flow down. After that, when the game ball finishes flowing down the bypass flow path 653, since the ball entry restricting plate 654 is open, the game ball enters the second specified winning hole 650b. On the other hand, at the exit passage timing after the second ball entry timing, when the game ball finishes flowing down the bypass channel 653, the ball entry regulation plate 654 is not the timing to open (that is, it is closed). Does not enter the second specified winning hole 650b, but passes through the exit portion 652c.

  As described above, whether or not the game ball that did not enter the first specified winning opening 650a wins the second specified winning opening 650b can be determined by the opening / closing timing of the winning restriction plate 654.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the opening and closing pattern of the prize regulation plate 654 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the open / close pattern A in which the game ball which did not enter the first specified winning opening 650a easily wins the second specified winning opening 650b. b) is a schematic view schematically showing an open / close pattern B in which the game ball that did not enter the first specified winning combination hole 650a is less likely to win the second specified winning combination hole 650b.

  Although the details will be described later, this open / close pattern is selected based on the jackpot type. In the present control example, the open / close pattern is selected based on the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be selected regardless of the jackpot type. As a result, even with the same jackpot type, a change is generated in the game value that can be acquired by the player due to the opening and closing pattern, so it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  Since the upper stage, middle stage, and lower stage of FIGS. 55 (a) and (b) respectively show the same timing as FIG. 54, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the opening and closing pattern A shown in FIG. 55 (a), among the game balls fired at a constant interval, one ball enters two balls when the prize restricting plate 654 is open, and the other ball is a winning It is opened and closed so as to enter the ball when the regulating plate 654 is closed. Here, as shown in the drawing, the game balls detoured enter the second specified winning opening 650b because the prize regulation plate 654 is in the open state when flowing down the detour flow path 653.

  On the other hand, in the opening and closing pattern B shown in FIG. 55 (b), among the game balls fired at a constant interval, one ball is inserted into the specific winning device 650 at a timing when one of the two balls is open by the prize restricting plate 654. The same is true. However, as compared to the opening and closing pattern A, the timing at which the ball restriction plate 654 is opened for the second time is earlier, and the timing at which the first ball of the game ball detour ends flowing down the detour flow path 653 is on as shown. Since the ball regulating plate 654 is in the closed state, it does not enter the second specified winning hole 650b. Therefore, compared with the opening and closing pattern A, the opening and closing pattern B is an opening and closing pattern in which the game ball is less likely to enter the specific winning hole.

  In addition, the opening / closing timing of the ball entry regulating plate 654 may be set appropriately without being limited to the above-described opening / closing pattern. For example, all game balls that did not enter the first specified winning combination 650a may be set to enter the second specified winning combination 650b, or all entered the second specified winning combination 650b It may be set so as not to pass (ie, all pass through the outlet 652c). Further, the opening / closing timing of the ball entry regulating plate 654 is appropriately set according to the shape, the total length, etc. of the bypass flow path (the required time required for the game ball to pass).

  Furthermore, a plurality of detour paths having different times for the game balls to pass may be provided, and the game balls that have not entered the first specified winning opening 650a may be distributed to those detour paths. For example, a game ball that has not entered the first specified winning hole 650a may be provided with a detour path where it is easy to enter the second specified winning port 650b and a detour path where it is difficult to enter the ball. Thereby, even if the opening and closing patterns are the same, the ease of entering the ball can be changed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, in order to restrict entry to the first specified winning opening 650a and the second specified winning opening 650b, one ball entry restricting plate 654 is used, but the present invention is not limited thereto. You may provide separately the ball entry control board which controls the ball entry of these. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation for restricting entry to each specified winning combination, and to improve the player's interest.

  Further, in this control example, the ball entering regulation plate 654 in the specified winning device 650 restricts the entering of the first specified winning opening 650a and the second specified winning opening 650b, which are a part of the specified winning opening. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the first specified winning opening 650a or the second specified winning opening 650b, the second winning opening 640 may be provided, or the general winning opening 63 may be provided. It is also good.

  Next, detection results of various sensors provided inside the specific winning device 650 and effect display during a jackpot game based on the detection results will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. FIG. 56 is a schematic view schematically showing detection timings of various sensors and contents of effect display based on the detection results. Moreover, FIGS. 57 to 59 are schematic views exemplifying the contents of each effect display.

  When the first game ball enters the specific winning device 650 after the start of the big hit game, the ball is detected by the entrance sensor 900a (when the first entrance sensor in FIG. 56 is detected). As a result, the effect based on the first game ball (the first ball effect in FIG. 56) is started, and the appearance effect is displayed (see FIG. 57A). The effect screen in this case is a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown at the bottom.

  Then, when the entering ball of the second and third balls is detected by the entrance sensor 900a while displaying the appearance effect (when the second ball entrance sensor is detected and the third ball entrance sensor is detected in FIG. 56) The effects based on the second and third ball game balls (the second and third ball effects in FIG. 56) are started, and the on-the-fly effect is displayed based on the respective detection results. By the effect during appearance, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), a pattern of a cat indicating the number during appearance of a cat is displayed in the lower right part. The number during cat appearance indicates the number of pending effects, and when the effect based on the first game ball is over, the number during cat appearance is reduced by 1 and the effect based on the second game ball is executed. It will be done.

  If it is detected by the detour sensor 900b that the first game ball has not entered the first specified winning opening 650a and has passed the detour entrance 653a of the detour flow path 653 (when the detour sensor in FIG. 56 is detected) The effect based on the first game ball is changed from the appearance effect to the escape effect (see FIG. 57 (b)). The effect screen in this case is a special effect screen displayed on two screens as shown at the bottom. With this special effect screen, it is possible to display an effect (runaway effect) based on the first game ball on the left side of the screen, and display an effect (appearance effect) based on the second game ball on the right side of the screen. (See FIG. 57 (b)).

  Thereafter, when the second game ball enters the first specified winning hole 650a, when it is detected by the first ball sensor 652a, an appearance effect based on the second game ball on the right side of the screen is to capture effect And (see FIG. 58 (a)). When this capture effect is over, an appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed on the right side of the screen.

  Next, when the first game ball finishes flowing down the bypass channel 653 and enters the second specified winning hole 650b, when it is detected by the second ball entry sensor 652b, the first game on the left side of the screen The escape presentation based on the ball is changed to the recapture presentation (see FIG. 58 (b)). When this recapture effect ends, the effect displayed on the left side of the screen disappears, so the effect screen becomes a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown at the bottom, and an appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed It will be done.

  On the other hand, when it is detected by the exit sensor 900c that the first game ball has finished flowing down the bypass flow path 653 and has passed through the exit portion 652c without entering the second specified winning hole 650b, 1 on the left side of the screen An escape effect based on the ball of the ball is changed to a capture failure effect (see FIG. 59A). When this capture failure effect is over, the effect to be displayed on the left side of the screen disappears as in the case of FIG. 58 (b) described above, so the appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed as the normal effect screen .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), the case where the capture effect is executed on the normal effect screen will be described. FIG. 59 (b) is an effect display that is displayed when the first game ball enters the first specified winning opening 650a when FIG. 57 (a) described above is displayed. As described above, when there are gaming balls flowing down the detour flow path 653 and gaming balls from the entrance 651a to the detour flow path 653, effects based on the respective game balls are displayed by the special effect screen. At the same time, they are visible. On the other hand, when only one game ball is present, the effect based on the corresponding game ball is displayed by the normal effect screen.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the display contents of the bonus interlocking effect will be described. 60 and 61 are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, and the first spherical character 330 and the second spherical character 340.

  The role interlocking effect is an effect to be executed during the variable display. When this feature interlocking effect is executed, the variable display being executed is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 60 (a). In addition, the first spherical character 330 and the second spherical character 340 are lit, and a pattern (PUSH pattern) in which the letters of PUSH are circled is displayed on the upper right and upper left of the screen (see FIG. 60 (a)) . The PUSH pattern displayed in the upper left moves to the lower right, and the PUSH pattern displayed in the upper right is moved to the lower left (FIG. 60 (b)).

  Then, the two PUSH patterns are moved so as to overlap at the center of the screen (see FIG. 61 (a)), and at the timing when the two PUSH patterns completely overlap, the first spherical character 330 and the second spherical character The object 340 is extinguished, and a gauge indicating the button depression remaining time is displayed on the lower right of the screen (see FIG. 61B). Here, the first spherical character 330 and the second spherical character respectively have a first spherical cover body (330a, 330b) and a second spherical cover body (340a, 340b), and the first spherical role body At a timing when the object 330 and the second spherical character 340 are extinguished, it is moved to a position covering the front surface of the spherical character. These spherical cover bodies are moved by a first product motor 330c and a second product motor 340c (not shown).

  Next, background interlocking production will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63 are schematic views schematically showing display contents of the background interlocking effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

  In this control example, a display indicating the degree of expectation to be a jackpot is displayed on the upper right of the screen as part of the background display. Specifically, the background level of "level 1", "level 2", "level 3" and "level 4" is displayed in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81. The background level of “level 1” is a display that suggests that the jackpot expectation is the lowest, and the background level of “level 4” is a display that indicates that the jackpot expectation is the highest. The background level is changed during the variable display or at the start of the change, and is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). The detailed description will be described later.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 62, the case where the background level is changed during the variable display will be described. When the background level is "level 1", the symbols in the left and right columns of the variable display are stopped, and the character of "continuation level 2" is displayed at the center (see FIG. 62 (a)). Thereafter, the variable display is started again, and the background level is changed to "level 2" (see FIG. 62 (b)). Here, the case where the background level is changed from “level 1” to “level 2” has been described, but it is also possible to change from “level 1” to “level 3” or “level 4” during the variable display of 1 is there.

  Next, referring to FIG. 63, the case where the background level is changed at the start of the variable display will be described. In FIG. 62 (b) described above, after the background level is changed to “level 2”, the variable display is stopped (see FIG. 63 (a)). After that, the next variable display is started, and the characters “level up!” Are displayed at the top of the screen, and the background level is changed to “level 3”.

  As described above, in this control example, it is possible to change the background level during the variable display of 1 as described in FIG. 62, and as described in FIG. Can also be used continuously. As a result, even in the variable display after the variable display of 1 in which the display with the high expectation for the jackpot is performed, the expectation for the jackpot can be continuously set high, so that the player's interest can be increased. Can be improved.

  Although the description is omitted in this control example, usually, in the case of executing the variation of the special symbol, effects such as display of characters and comments indicating the degree of expectation of various jackpots and sounds are executed in the gaming machine. In such a configuration, since the notice display mode indicating various different degrees of expectation is displayed, the player does not know which degree of expectation to look at and determines the degree of expectation to the jackpot, and the notice display indicating the degree of expectation There is a problem that you lose interest or you get bored early in the game without understanding the contents of the notice. However, in the present control example, since the background level is displayed on the background screen as the overall expectation while changing the special symbol, it is possible to play the game with reference to the expectation. Therefore, the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the background level is changed every time the pseudo stop in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, it is understood that the overall expectation is changed from the expectation in the notice of the false stop. Is easy to understand and can play the game.

  In the present embodiment, the background level is changed by performing the pseudo stop, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the background level is changed based on the display of a notice such as a character or a comment. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, it is possible to display the expectation level by changing the color of the third pattern, for example, and to always display the character showing the general expectation level, instead of displaying the general expectation level at the background level. Then, the display mode of the character may be changed (for example, the pattern, the color, etc. of the clothes may be changed) so as to represent the overall expectation.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the background level is configured to be displayed not only in the case of the change but also when the change is stopped and the next change is started. By comprising in this way, it was comprised so that the degree of expectation of the number of times by which the 3rd design is temporarily stopped can be changed. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol is started with the background level being 3, the temporary stop is performed once, and the fluctuation mode with high expectation to the jackpot is displayed. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game by always being aware of what the background level is.

  Moreover, in this control example, the background level is used as the comprehensive expectation when the pseudo stop is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the variable display when the pseudo stop is not performed, the current mode state is It may be configured to display by level. In this case, the table of the variation mode selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed without changing the fluctuation time notified from the main control device 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.) Configure to change the mode (for example, in the background level 1, the variation mode of single display where the display area is not divided, in the background level 2, the display area is divided into two, and the third symbol is displayed independently on each of them In the variation pattern of the double display mode, background level 3 is similarly divided into three, and a multi-display mode in which the third symbol is variably displayed. By configuring in this way, the display of the background level indicates the degree of expectation by the content of the variation pattern of the special symbol (whether or not the temporary stop variation is made), and the variation pattern selection mode is indicated. It can be switched.

  Furthermore, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the background level may be configured to vary the frequency of rising and the range of rising and the frequency and frequency of falling and the like depending on the gaming state such as the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. . Furthermore, as the background level is higher, it may be easier to select a variation pattern in which a pseudo stop (temporary stop) is performed. On the contrary, the lower the background level, the easier the pseudo stop may be performed. Furthermore, when the background level is previously set to the fluctuation pattern to be variably displayed, and the fluctuation pattern is to be variably displayed, it may be configured to be set to the set background level.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 64 to 76. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, and is the same as the control examples described above, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device (not shown), and third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting of display in The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37, setting of display in the second symbol display device (not shown), and third symbol display device 81 Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set display and the like.

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 86) Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 j set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 holding ball corresponding to winning on the first left winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). An area 203a is provided, and in each of these areas, a first random number counter C1 and a first type counter C2 are matched according to the timing of entering the left first prize opening 64a or the right first prize opening 64b. The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and a ball is common in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through the starting opening (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 86).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first hit random number table is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol, and high probability (special symbol special probability of being a big hit from low probability) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. In addition, the first hit random number table 202a for high probability of special symbol and the first hit random number table 202a for low probability of special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 (FIG. 66). reference).

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0 to 9” in the lottery of the special symbol. , And “0 to 9”, it is determined to be a jackpot. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the jackpot is large.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is won in the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "0" is the first random number table for low probability It is stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/400".

  On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/40".

  In this control example, the random number value which is a big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability time, and the random number value which is a big hit stored in the first random number table for high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set to be the respective jackpots. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol) as in this control example, the random number value to be the jackpot is changed Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "0 to 49" is "jackpot A". In addition, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "50 to 99" is "jackpot B". In the present control example, two types of jackpots are used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. In addition, even if it is the same value of the first hit type counter C2 by the jackpot based on entering the first winning opening 64 and the jackpot based on entering the second winning opening 640, different jackpot types are selected It may be configured to be By configuring in this way, for example, when it becomes a big hit based on entering the second winning hole 640, by making it easy to select a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player, the second winning hole 640 It is possible to make the player more expecting a jackpot based on entering the ball. Here, the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening that facilitates entry in the short time gaming state described later. Therefore, when transitioning to the time saving game state, it is possible for the player to be in a more advantageous state, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengaging displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol stops at other than the reach symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected, for example, a range of 90 to 99, and a "completely out of range" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, a range of random number values set for each type of stoppage of deviation Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time to the first winning opening 64, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 for low probability Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A so-called short time deviation, a long time deviation, and a rough display mode such as normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 86) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67A) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, for example, various kinds of "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time use)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach", and the like are defined as outlier fluctuation patterns, As the variation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). The fluctuation pattern table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and the fluctuation pattern contents further detailed corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output by the main control unit 110 are fluctuation pattern table 222a. It is selected.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random symbol table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary symbol When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the per random number table, it is determined that the symbol is normal. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (c), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values corresponding to the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the passage opening 645 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the passage port 645 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol comes into contact, but the opening time is The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the electric winning combination attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "one second x 2 times". As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the normal symbol's low probability, and further, it accompanies the second winning opening 640 Since the opening period of the motorized combination becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the electric winning symbol attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for "one second x 2 times" when the normal symbol comes into contact. However, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

  Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. .

  As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 66 (a)) is a table in which the value of the random number serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the first random number table 202a includes a table (first random number table 202a for low probability) and a high value for the special symbol to determine whether the special symbol is a big hit or not when the special symbol is low. There is a table (the first random number table 202a for high probability time) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit at the time of probability, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each table is different. There is. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected. Specifically, the value "0 to 49" of the first collision type counter C2 is set as the judgment value of the jackpot A, and "50 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the jackpot B.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the low probability of the normal symbol (in the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28 In the case of, it is determined to be a hit of an ordinary symbol. In addition, as above-mentioned, when it is judged that it is a hit of a normal symbol, while the variation display in a 2nd symbol display apparatus is complete | finished, while the symbol of "O" is light-displayed as a stop symbol (2nd symbol), The motorized accessory associated with the passage port 645 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67A) is a data table used to determine the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern, and the display pattern is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)); At least a deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 67 (d)) is defined. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the fluctuation pattern table etc. in time saving game state etc. are set besides this.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 67 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

  Specifically, “0 to 50” is the variation pattern of various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “51 to 179” is the variety of special reach (90 seconds) for the variation patterns of various types of super reach (60 seconds). For the fluctuation pattern of), "180 to 198" are respectively set as the determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern for which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired is set as a big hit It is selected from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 67 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the (normal) deviation pattern table 202d2 for disconnection. The off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non reach) or out of reach (common in reach) from the stop type selection table not shown is a stop type It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set.

  Here, if the variation pattern type is completely out of the range, a relatively short variation (7 seconds) of variation time and a long variation (10 seconds) of variation time are set. “0 to 98” is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  In addition, for outreach, “0 to 149” for various outreach normal reach (30 seconds), “150 to 197” for outfall super reach (60 seconds), outlier special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 determines the type of stop, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for removal Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 67 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the out-of-order (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. The disconnection (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol to be detached when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different from the above-described deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 in the value of the set fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete removal is determined If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the outreach is determined.

  As described above, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation at the time of the definite change becomes long and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, the game is postponed during the probability change gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels bored.

  Referring back to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. FIG. 65 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 is a stack area where the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 86), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 85) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 84) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag 203e. And at least a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is the first winning opening 64 or The respective values of the first collision random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 acquired based on winning in the second winning opening 640 are respectively stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is four. Among the vacant areas of the holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as the drawing of the special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the vacant area of), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a first special symbol (first symbol) to be performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, One is added to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 80). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 78).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 78 and S405 in FIG. 80). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the holding ball number symbol (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number notified by the display holding ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is for the maximum number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed in the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 It is a counter to count. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. See S704 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 82).

  When the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (see S705 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S703 of FIG. 83: No).

  The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether the current gaming state is a probability change gaming state (probability change gaming state). When the probability change flag 203e is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability change gaming state, and when it is off, it indicates that the low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In this control example, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) at the end of the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203e is set to ON (see S1114 in FIG. 87). Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off (see S1102 in FIG. 87). In the initialized state, it is set to be off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. If it is determined that the big hit type is big hit B (16 R hour short hit) at the end of the big hit game, 100 is set. That is, in this control example, when it is not set to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game, it shifts to 100 time saving gaming states.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via the bus line 224 configured by the address bus and the data bus as described above. In the input / output port 225, the main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, other units 228, the first function motor 330c, the second function motor 340c, the inlet The center 900a, the detour sensor 900b, the outlet sensor 900c, and the like are connected to each other (see FIG. 4).

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the back surface image of the present control example includes a display in which a display (level display) indicating an expectation of becoming a big hit is displayed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 68A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a feature interlocking effect table 222b, an opening and closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, and an SW scenario storage area 222e. In addition, various data, programs, etc. necessary for controlling the game are stored.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types (out, reach out, various types of reach, etc.) of each fluctuation pattern are respectively set to counter values for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The character interlocking effect table 222b is a table defining the operation pattern of the spherical character (330, 340) and the pattern of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for executing the above mentioned character interlocking effect. It is. By setting the operation of the spherical character and the display effect on the basis of the table, it is possible to execute a combination effect of interlocking the operation of the spherical character and the display effect. The detailed contents of the role interlocking effect table 222b will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 (a).

  The open / close pattern storage area 222c defines the relation between the open / close pattern of the entry restriction plate 653 of the specific winning device 650 and the big hit type during the big hit game. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot A, the open / close pattern A is selected, and in the case of the jackpot B, the open / close pattern B is selected. As described above, the jackpot A is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B in that the jackpot A is in a definite change state. Further, as described above, the open / close pattern A is advantageous to the player compared to the open / close pattern B in that the game ball easily enters the second specified winning opening 650b. Therefore, since the opening / closing pattern A is selected at the jackpot A, the jackpot A becomes a jackpot more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player is expected to perform the game in expectation of becoming a big hit A, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The opening / closing pattern B may be selected in the case of the jackpot A, and the opening / closing pattern A may be selected in the case of the jackpot B. In addition, the selection of the opening and closing pattern may not be based on the jackpot type, and may be selected based on, for example, the value of the effect counter 223 j described later. Thereby, even if it is the same jackpot type, whether or not it becomes advantageous for the player changes depending on the opening and closing pattern to be selected, so that the player is interested in both the jackpot type and the opening and closing pattern. Thus, the player's interest can be improved. Furthermore, the opening and closing pattern may be selected based on the jackpot type and the effect counter described above, or the jackpot type and opening and closing pattern may be further increased, for example, the jackpot type C and the opening and closing pattern C may be increased. .

  The background lottery table 222 d defines the background level to be shifted based on the result of the judgment of the pass / fail, the current background level, and the value of the effect counter 223 j described later. Based on this table, the background level can be changed in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). The details of the background lottery table 222d will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 (b).

  The SW scenario storage area 222 e is an area storing a SW scenario that defines a period in which pressing of the SW becomes effective in the above-described role-linked effect. By controlling the lighting operation of the spherical character (330, 340) and the frame button 22 based on this SW scenario, the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 113, and the spherical character (330, 340) and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be linked to produce effects.

  Here, the frame button 22 is lighted in the SW effective period based on the SW scenario. By turning on the frame button 22, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a period in which the SW can be pressed.

  Subsequently, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a big hit effective flag 223e. , First entry flag 223f, second entry flag 223g, remaining counter 223h, measurement counter 223i, effect counter 223j, opening and closing pattern storage area 223k, in-round flag 223m, exit timing counter 223n, SW scenario setting area 223o, continuous At least a background flag 223p, a background flag 223q, a power-off processing flag 223x, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or the main controller 110 changes in a special symbol When the display is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1408 in FIG. 90). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the number-of-held-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1603 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when the setting of fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2102 in FIG. 97). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 90) and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2108 in FIG. 97). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The jackpot effective flag 223e is turned on when the first round of the jackpot game is started and the jackpot effect is activated (see S1808 in FIG. 94), and is turned off 5 seconds after the jackpot game is over. (See S1819 in FIG. 94). When the jackpot effective flag 223e is turned on, a jackpot effect (see FIGS. 57 to 59) based on the detection results of various sensors disposed in the specific winning device 650 in the jackpot middle effect processing (FIG. 98). Will be executed.

  The first entering flag 223f is turned on when the first entering command is received from the main control unit 110 (see S1903 in FIG. 95), and processing based on the reception of the first entering command in the jackpot middle effect processing is performed It is turned off when executed (see 2211 in FIG. 98). The first entry command is a command transmitted when the gaming ball enters the first specified winning opening 650a by the first entry sensor 650a. When the first entering flag 223f is turned on, a display capture command is displayed from the voice lamp control unit 113 based on the detection result of the gaming ball by the first entering sensor 650a of the main control unit 110. Can be sent to. When the display control device 114 receives the display capture command, the display control device 114 executes processing for displaying a capture effect (see FIG. 58A) on the third symbol display device.

  The second entering flag 223g is turned on when the second entering command is received from the main control unit 110 (see S1905 in FIG. 95), and the processing based on the reception of the second entering command is executed in the jackpot middle effect processing If it is turned off (see S2214 in FIG. 98). The second entry command is a command transmitted when the game ball enters the second specified winning opening 650b by the second entry sensor 650b. When the second entering flag 223g is turned on, a display recapture command is displayed from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the detection result of the gaming ball by the second entering sensor 650b of the main control device 110. It can be sent to 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display recapture command, the display control device 114 executes processing for displaying a recapture effect (see FIG. 58B) on the third symbol display device.

  The remaining counter 223h is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the ending effect in the jackpot effect is performed, and is incremented by one each time the jackpot command processing is performed after the ending effect is performed. (See S1816 in FIG. 94). Also, when the remaining counter reaches a value of 5 seconds or more in the jackpot command processing, it is reset (see S1818 in FIG. 94).

  The measurement counter 223i is a counter for measuring the opening / closing timing of the ball entry restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 which is opened / closed by the main controller 110, and when the above-mentioned big hit effective flag 223e is on, ie, big hit When a game is being executed, one is added each time the jackpot effect processing is executed (see S2202 in FIG. 98). When the jackpot effective flag 223e described above is turned off, both are reset (see S1817 in FIG. 94). This measurement counter 223i is referred to in the entrance passing process (FIG. 99) together with the information on the opening / closing pattern storage area, and is used to determine which timing the game ball enters the specified winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99).

  The effect counter 223 j is a counter used for various lotterys such as linked effects and background lottery, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 399. The effect counter 223 j is updated one by one in the process of S 1315 each time the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed.

  The opening / closing pattern storage area 223 k stores information of the opening / closing pattern storage area 222 c corresponding to the big hit type when the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S 1802 in FIG. 94). As described above, the open / close pattern storage area 223k is referred to together with the measurement counter 223i in the entrance passing process, and is used to determine which timing the game ball enters the specified winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99). In this control example, when the opening command which is the timing at which the big hit is started is received, the open / close pattern storage area is also updated with clearing, but when the big hit effective flag 223e is turned off, etc. It may be cleared.

  The in-round flag 223 m is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (while the entry restriction plate 654 of the specified winning device 650 is open). The during-round flag 223 m is set to ON when a round start command is received from the main control unit 110 (S 1806 in FIG. 94), and is set to OFF when a round end command is received from the main control unit 110 ( S1810 in FIG.

  The exit timing counter 223 n counts the number of gaming balls at which the timing of entering the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game round is the exit passage timing. The exit timing counter 223 n is incremented by one when it is determined that the passage timing is the exit timing in the entrance passing process that is executed when the ball entering the specified winning device 650 is detected (see FIG. 99 S2305). Further, in the entrance passing process, when the jackpot game is over and the above-mentioned jackpot effective flag 223e is turned off, both are reset (S1817 in FIG. 94).

  The exit timing counter is referred to in the entrance passing process, and when the number of exit timing counters becomes equal to or more than the predetermined number during the round of big hit game of the opening / closing pattern A which is easy to enter the second specified winning opening 650b (ie, 2) The display timing notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (when the number of gaming balls passing through the exit portion 652c is larger than the predetermined number) without entering the specific winning hole 650b (S2307 in FIG. 99) . When the display control device 114 receives the display timing notification command, the display control device 114 executes effect display for changing the launch timing of the player. Thus, although the opening / closing pattern A is easy to enter the second specified winning opening 650b, for the player who is firing the game ball at the timing when it is difficult to enter the second specified winning opening 650b, Since the firing timing can be changed, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage to the player.

  When the continuous background flag 223p receives a winning command based on a big hit starting winning from the main control unit 110, the background level indicating the above-mentioned big hit expectation is indicated until the variable display based on the starting winning is started. It is a flag for changing (rising) the level continuously. The continuous background flag 223 p is set to ON when the effect counter is “0 to 49” when it is determined that the jackpot command has been received in the winning command reception process (see S1708 in FIG. 93). When the continuous background flag 223p is set to ON, background change data is set for each of the holding balls (see S1707 in FIG. 93). Therefore, in the background change lottery process executed thereafter, the continuous background flag 223p is referred to, and when it is on, the process of background change is skipped (see S1601 in FIG. 92). The continuous background flag 223p is a flag that is automatically turned off at the start of the jackpot game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning command is received, the effect of continuously increasing the expectation of the background when the result is a big hit is configured to be performed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to execute. In this case, by continuously changing the background in the case of outreach or outreach, it is possible to maintain the jackpot expectation even when the change is started.

  The background flag 223 q stores the set background level when the background is changed in the background change lottery process (FIG. 92) and the variable display setting process (FIG. 97). The background flag 223 q is referred to in the background change lottery process, and a process according to the current background level is executed (see S1604 in FIG. 92).

  The power-off processing flag 223x sends a power-off command to the voice lamp control unit 113 when the main controller 110 detects a power-off, and when the voice lamp control unit 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y It is set to ON, and the power-off process is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). Then, when the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag 223x is set to off (S1320 in FIG. 89). The power-off process flag 223x is referred to in the start-up process (see S1202 in FIG. 88). When it is on, the power-off process is being executed and the power is shut down (that is, the RAM is broken). It is determined that the process is executed when the RAM is destroyed without checking the RAM destruction.

  When the main controller 110 detects a power-off, the power-off flag 223y sends a power-off command to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the audio lamp control unit 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y turns on. The setting is performed, and the power-off process is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). Then, in the startup process (FIG. 88) of the audio lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the power-off flag 223y is set off (S1210 in FIG. 88). ).

  The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 90) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69 (a), the details of the accessory interlocking effect table 222b will be described. FIG. 69A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the gift interlocking effect table 222b.

  The feature interlocking effect table 222b defines the effect to be selected based on the variation pattern type and the value of the effect counter. Specifically, when the type of fluctuation pattern is "normal reach", SW effect A1 is selected if the effect counter is "0 to 199", and SW effect A2 if the effect counter is "200 to 349" Is selected, and if the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect A3 is selected. When the type of fluctuation pattern is "super reach", SW effect B1 is selected if the effect counter is "0 to 199", and SW effect B2 is selected if the effect counter is "200 to 349" If the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect B3 is selected. Furthermore, when the type of fluctuation pattern is “special reach”, SW effect C1 is selected if the effect counter is “0 to 199”, and SW effect C2 is selected if the effect counter is “200 to 349” If the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect C3 is selected.

  Here, as described above, each variation pattern type is one in which different variation times are set. In this control example, the selected SW effect is changed according to the fluctuation pattern type. Thereby, according to a fluctuation pattern, SW production of suitable production time can be chosen.

  Next, the details of the background lottery table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (b). FIG. 69 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the background lottery table 222d.

  The background lottery table 222d defines the background level of the transition destination based on the current background level and the effect counter 223j, and is defined so that the result of the pass / fail determination differs between the hit and the missed.

  Specifically, first, the case where the result of the judgment of success is a hit will be described. If the result of the judgment is a hit and the current background level is "level 1", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the background level of the transition destination becomes "level 2", " If 200 ", the background level of the transition destination is" level 4 ", and if" 201 to 399 ", the background level is not changed. When the current background level is "level 2", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 19", the background level of the transition destination is "level 1", and if it is "20 to 159" The background level of the transition destination is “level 3”, and if “200”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 4”, and if “201 to 399”, the background level is not changed. Furthermore, when the current background level is “level 3”, if the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 29”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2”, and “30 to 139”. For example, it is specified that the background level of the transition destination is "level 4" and that the background level is not changed if "140 to 399". When the current background level is "level 4", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 39", the background level of the transition destination is "level 3", and if it is "40 to 399" It is defined that the background level is not changed.

  Next, the case in which the result of the judgment of acceptance is out of order will be described. If the result of the judgment is out of step and the current background level is "level 1", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the background level of the transition destination becomes "level 2", " If it is 150 to 399 ", it is defined that the background level is not changed. When the current background level is "level 2", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 49", the background level of the transition destination is "level 1", and if it is "50 to 99" It is specified that the background level of the transition destination is "level 3" and that the background level is not changed if "100 to 399". Furthermore, when the current background level is “level 3”, if the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 79”, the background level of the transition destination is “level 2”, and “80 to 99”. For example, it is defined that the background level of the transition destination is "level 4" and that the background level is not changed if "100 to 399". When the current background level is "level 4", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", the background level of the transition destination is "level 3", and if it is "300 to 399" It is defined that the background level is not changed.

  As described above, the background level is defined so that the background level is likely to rise easily and is hard to fall when the result of the judgment is a hit, and it is defined that the background level is unlikely to rise and easily when the result of the judgment is out. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the background level indicating the degree of expectation to be the jackpot is frequently increased, although the result of the judgment of the success or failure is out.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is a NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 101) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 76) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the third symbol An area 235 d, a character symbol area 235 e, an error message image area 235 f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235 b are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. When the entry of the ball is detected, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the fluctuation effect, is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 100).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, as shown in FIG. 72 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 72 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" is shown at the lower right position on the main screen when the power is turned on. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 72 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of special symbol”, and when “out of special symbol” is shown in FIG. 72 (c) The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 73, the range of the rear surface image and the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c among the rear surface image will be described. FIG. 73 is an explanatory view for explaining the range of the rear side image and the rear side image stored in the rear side image area 235c of the video RAM 235 for residence with respect to each rear side image. FIG. 73 (a) 73 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage".

  Of the back faces A and B, the back face images corresponding to the back faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 73, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "image for scrolling") are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage is a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is resident video RAM 235 Is stored in the rear image area 235c of

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ', and the position a to the position a including the initial position Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the player can press the frame button by the player. When the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed by the third symbol by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 It can be displayed on the device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone is not changed with the passage of time. It is possible to display et al. Further, as for the back surface B, only the image data corresponding to the partial image range is stored, so that the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  In the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 70) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 53) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the effect is not immediately started.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Next, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, an appearance effect flag 223m, an appearance counter 223n, an escape counter 223p, a capture counter 233r, a recapture counter 223s, and other storage areas 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko game machine 10 has shifted to the special game state from now on and the ball entry restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 which is normally closed is repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and informs the player of the game value (short period of time of the normal symbol) to be given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol being held. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the short term of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short term of the normal symbol. Since the longer the short term of the normal symbol, the more chances of the ball passing through the through gate 67, the more chances of the normal symbol drawing will be made, and the more chances for the normal symbol to hit. Therefore, the chance to enter the second winning opening 640 becomes easier because the chance to open the electric winning combination becomes a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy to be drawn lottery of special symbols. Therefore, the longer the short term of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball enters the ball, the electric jackpot is opened as a normal hit of the symbol, and the ball is the first winning opening The more you get to 64, the more balls you get. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the special symbol being held will be a big hit of the special symbol in the ending effect, the player can select the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol being held. Since it can be recognized that the player wins the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the jackpot of the special symbol will surely be made. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates either of the back surfaces A, B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “in the town stage” or “empty stage”), or a back surface different from the back surfaces A, B Information specifying whether to display an image is described. Further, in the case of specifying to display a rear surface image different from the rear surfaces A and B, the rear surface type also describes information specifying which rear surface image to display.

  When it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 75 correspond to each other). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 75).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 75) In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 75, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2405 in FIG. 100). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S4905 in FIG. 120 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 36 ()), and the simplified image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2708 of FIG. 102 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (FIG. 102) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (B) (see S2709) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 116) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are performed.

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see 2705 in FIG. 102B), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 120 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 76) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later (see FIG. 76) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 102 (b In step S2703), pointer update processing (see S4505 in FIG. 117) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. (Refer to FIG. 76) and at the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 76, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4507 in FIG. 117). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  For all stored sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to that sprite in the image storage area 236a of the ordinary video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by an initial setting process (see S 2402 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233j is performed when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S5013 in FIG. 121). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S5014 in FIG. 121). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 102B) is performed, the process is performed (see S5102 of FIG. 122).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Referring back to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. The appearance effect flag 233m is a flag indicating whether or not the appearance effect (see FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b)) described above is displayed during the big hit game. The appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON in the appearance effect process (S3607 in FIG. 109) when the appearance command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S110 in FIG. 109), and the escape effect process (FIG. 110) or the capture effect process It is set to off in FIG.

  The appearance counter 233 n is a counter that indicates the appearance effect described above and the number of pending appearance effects (see FIGS. 57A and 57B). This appearance counter 233n is incremented by one (S3608 in FIG. 109) when an appearance command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S3608 in FIG. 109), and is decremented by one in the escape effect processing (FIG. 110) or the capture effect processing (FIG. 112). Be done.

  The escape running counter 233 n is a counter that indicates the escape play effect and the number of reservations of the escape play effect described above (see FIG. 57B and FIGS. 58A and 58B). This runaway counter 233p is incremented by 1 when a display runaway command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S3705 or S3707 in FIG. 110), and failure effect processing (FIG. 111) or recapture effect processing (FIG. 113) Is decremented by one.

  The capture counter 233r counts the number of times the above-described capture effect (see FIGS. 58A and 59B) is executed, that is, the number of gaming balls entered into the first specified winning opening 650a. It is a counter. This capture counter 223r is incremented by one when a display capture command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S3901 in FIG. 112), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

  The recapture counter 233s is a counter for counting the number of times the above-described recapture effect (see FIG. 58B) is performed, that is, the number of gaming balls entered into the second specified winning opening 650b. This recapture counter 233 s is incremented by one when the display recapture command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S 4002 in FIG. 113), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

  The other storage area 233z has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the audio lamp control device 113 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 103) of the display control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed by the command determination process. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

<About control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Although illustration is omitted, in the process of S101, when the first ball entry sensor 652a detects the ball entering the first specified winning hole 650a in the specified winning device 650, a first ball entry command is set, If the second entry ball sensor 652b detects entry into the second specified winning opening 650b, a second entry command is set. The first entering command and the second entering command set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are external output processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 86). In S1001), it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum (in this control example, When reaching 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S104), and then, The start-up winning process is executed in association with the winning (starting-up winning) to the first winning opening 64 (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed To do (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In this control example, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 when the jackpot A is to be made, and the red LED is turned on when the jackpot B is being made. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212).

  And the start of the jackpot of a special symbol is set (S213), and it shifts to processing of S216. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S217, it is determined in the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 86) that the jackpot has been started (S1101: Yes). As a result, an opening command is set by the processing of S1103 and an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot is executed. After the jackpot game is started, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress in the process of S1104 until the jackpot game is ended (S1104: Yes). Thereafter, when the jackpot game ends, it is determined in the process of S1111 that it is the start timing of the ending effect, and the ending command is set, and the probability change flag is turned on according to the jackpot type (S1114) The hour and hour counter is set (S1115).

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 If it is the above (S214: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S216.

  When the process of S213, S214 or S215 is finished, a stop command is set (S216), and this process is ended. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 86) to be described later executed by the MPU 201 It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes processing for stopping the variable display being executed with the stop type received by the stop type command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). The special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If the probability change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the definite variation state of the special symbol, and if the value of the probability change flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal condition of the special symbol.

  If the value of the flag 203e during the probability variation is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301, and the time of high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability change flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. Then, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. One of "0" is set as a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes these hits match, the special symbol is Determined to be a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first collision type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the big hit of the 3 types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot It is determined that it is B (16 R time short-time winning) (see FIG. 66 (b)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big jack A, jack B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach", and "disappearing special reach" are defined. As the fluctuation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B common, various kinds of "shared normal reach", various kinds of "shared super reach", various kinds of "shared special reach" are defined, and as the fluctuation pattern of hit / outward common, "shared normal reach" A variety of "shared super reach" and "shared special reach" are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than the back and forth, or a complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 86). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, for convenience of explanation, first, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described, and then, the prefetch processing (S407) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and determines whether or not the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has a winning (start winning), and the start winning is performed. In the case where there is any, it is a process for executing pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning) (S401). Here, entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number N of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol) Acquire (S402). Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: No), or the number of special symbol holding balls even if there is a winning on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. If the value (N) of the counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), The value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area. Next, the pre-reading process of S407 to be described later is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the prefetch process (S407) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing pre-reading processing (S407). This pre-reading process (S407) is executed in the above-mentioned start winning process (refer to FIG. 80), and performs pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the various random number counters acquired based on the starting win. It is a process for

  In the pre-reading process (S407), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). In the process of S501, when it is determined that there is no new winning (S501: No), it is not necessary to execute the pre-reading process, and this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that there is a new winning (S501: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state at the time when the variation based on the winning is started is the probability variation gaming state (S502).

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a definite change (S502: Yes), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 80) The lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 66A).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S502 that the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is not a definite change (S502: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the start winning process described above (see FIG. 80) The lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 66A).

  The method of obtaining the lottery result in the process of S503 or S504 is the same as the process of S303 or S304 in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) described above, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S503 or S504 is finished, a winning information information command is set based on the lottery result (S505), and this process is ended. The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result for the holding ball before the start of the change by receiving the prize information command. Thereby, the background interlocking effect to be described later can be suitably performed. In addition to the lottery result, the winning information command set here may include information such as a variation pattern. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine the fluctuation time and fluctuation effect based on the holding ball before the start of fluctuation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 or the electric motor accompanying the second winning opening 640 It is a process for controlling the opening time of the bonus.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. The middle part is included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The hour-time counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203f is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning device 650. However, when the electric winning combination attached to the second winning opening 640 is released, a ball intended to be won by the specific winning device 650 enters the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is for suppressing that the electrically-driven combination thing attached to the 2nd prize-winning mouth 640 is open | released, and to make it the state which is easy to make the specific prize-winning apparatus 650 win. In addition, since the specific winning device 650 is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening can be prevented even if the ball is prevented from entering the second winning opening 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol. Many balls enter in 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of balls held for the second winning opening 640 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / middle counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. , And the opening number and opening time of the motorized part are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the process of S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / storing counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the open period of the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is 0. 0. While setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 time (S617), and it shifts to processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the opening period of the motorized combination becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to If the stop display is set by the process of S623, then the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically operated combination attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. If the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the motorized part is performed when the motorized part opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is performed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage process (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if there is a ball passing, the second hit is made. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  If the ball has not passed through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the ball has passed through gate 67, the value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703) : No), end this processing. On the other hand, if the ball passes through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 85, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (one second in this control example) is performed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. Note that, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 86, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up processing will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) and the start winning process (see FIG. 80) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning combination information command set in the start winning combination processing is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 87) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the entry restriction plate 654 of the specific entry device 650 has elapsed, or the first specified winning opening 650a Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a specified number of times in the second specified winning opening 650b. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed. The opening and closing of the entrance restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized product associated with the second winning opening 640 (S1005). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 82), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79), the first symbol display is a variation display according to the variation pattern Start at device 37. In this control example, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 82), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 82), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 82), the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up)

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 84 has been executed, so that the processing at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 86), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winnings It is a process for opening or closing the ball entry restricting plate 654 of the device 650.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S208 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is turned off (S1102), the opening command is set (S1103), and the present process is ended.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1104: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened (S1106), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1107). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the ball entry restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the ball entry restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650, or the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when the player wins a predetermined number (for example, 10 in total).

  In the process of S1108, when the closing condition of the entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the entry restriction plate 654 of the specific entry device 650 is closed (S1109), and the round ends A command is set (S1110), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time is finished, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the process of S1111, if it is the start timing of ending effect (S1111: Yes), an ending command is set (S1112), and it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is a big hit A (S1113). If it is determined in the process of S1113 that the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (S1113: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S1114), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1113 that the jackpot B (16R hour / day big hit) (S1113: No), 100 is set to the hour / midday counter 203f (S1115), and this process is ended.

  The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the process of S1111, when it is not the start timing of the ending (S1111: No), this process is ended.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 99, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 88, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1319 is performed (see FIG. 89) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 89, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1316 in FIG. 89), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1319. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1319 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1319 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process in S1319 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S1319. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1319 is performed (see S1318 in FIG. 89). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1319 is executed, the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1319 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1210). Thereafter, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1211), the interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1204 to S1206 is performed via S1208. Or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 and S1210 which are the clear processing of the work area of the RAM 223 are skipped, the processing is shifted to S1211, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1211). Is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1301 has been executed (S1301), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the process of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, it is the process concerning S1302 to S1311 mainly regarding display (rendering) to determine whether 1 msec has elapsed, while it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). The command determination process of S1312, the variation display setting process of S1313, the jackpot effect process of S1314, and the process of updating the counter value of S1315 are preferably performed in a short cycle. Since the process of S1312 is performed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. The details of the frame button input monitoring and effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and then a bonus game operation process is executed (S1311), and the process shifts to the process of S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S1310 is completed, a bonus game operation process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1312. In the bonus game operation process, based on the bonus game movement data set in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 96) or the variation display setting process (FIG. 97), the operation of the spherical bonus (330, 340) is performed. It is a process to control. Here, since the bonus item movable data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW effect, the SW effect and the spherical character (330, 340) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 Can be linked with the operation of

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1312). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed in the process of S1313 (S1313). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a jackpot middle effect processing is performed (S1314). The details of the jackpot middle effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1314 is finished, the effect counter 223j, which is a counter used for the above-mentioned role interlocking effect or the lottery of the background level, is updated (S1315). Specifically, the value of the effect counter 223 j is read out from the RAM 223 and is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the effect counter 223j is stored in the effect counter 223j.

  When the process of S1315 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1316). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1316 (S1316: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1318), and the power-off process is executed (S1319). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1320), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S1316 (S1316: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1317: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), fluctuation pattern setting processing is performed (S1402), and then background change lottery processing is performed (S1403), and the processing returns to the main processing. Further, the details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 and the details of the background change lottery process with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 97) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), it is next determined whether the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1407). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of times of suspension N of the variable display in is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). Further, in the process of S1408, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1408 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected, or each time a lottery for a special symbol is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is made special according to the main controller 110 by the process of S1408. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1407, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1407: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1409). Then, when the winning command is received (S1409: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S1410), and the processing returns to the main processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball reaches the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and The values of the acquired counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in main controller 110, the original lottery from each value of each acquired counter C1 to C3 separately from the big hit lottery of the original special symbol The various information obtained when is performed is read ahead (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading ends in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the winning command processing, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading in main controller 110 is extracted as winning information from the received winning command, and the extracted winning information is stored in the winning information of RAM 223 It stores in the area 223a. Then, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the value of the effect counter 223j, with respect to the fluctuation effect held at that time, Decide if you want a series of effects. The details of the winning command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1409, when the winning command is not received (S1409: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1411). When the jackpot-related command is received (S1411: Yes), the jackpot command processing is executed (S1412), and the process returns to the main processing. Also, the details of the jackpot command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot-related command has not been received in the process of S1411 (S1411), it is then determined whether the first entering command or the second entering command has been received (S1413). When the first entering command or the second entering command is received (S1413: Yes), the jackpot winning process is executed (S1414), and the process returns to the main process. The details of the jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the first entering command or the second entering command is not received in the process of S1413 (S1413: No), the process corresponding to the other commands is executed (S1415), and the main process is performed. Return. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the variation pattern setting process (S1402) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (see S1402). This fluctuation pattern setting process (S1402) is a process executed when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, and the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the received command, and the necessary rendering command (SW rendering command , And notice effect production command).

  In the fluctuation pattern setting process (S1402), first, the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1501), and a fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the received fluctuation pattern command ( S1502). Next, it is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of SW performance (S1503). When it is determined in the process of S1503 that the selected fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of SW effect (S1503: Yes), the processes of S1504 to S1506 are executed to execute the SW effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1503 that the selected fluctuation pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of SW effect (S1503: No), there is no need to execute the SW effect, so the processes of S1504 to S1506 are skipped. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S1507.

  In the process of S1504, the SW effect is selected from the combination interlocking effect table based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1502 and the effect counter 223j (S1504). Next, a display SW effect command indicating the SW effect selected by the process of S1504 is set (S1505), and based on the SW effect selected by the process of S1504, the SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario storage area 222e, The acquired SW scenario is stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S1506), and the process proceeds to the process of S1507.

  Here, with the SW scenario, a period in which the frame button 22 is effectively set according to the variation period of the special symbol, a notice display content, a display content displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed, etc. are set. It is being done. The SW scenario is sequentially updated by the process of S2002 in the frame button input monitoring / presentation process (S1307), and the updated scenario is set. As a result, when the scenario updated and set is a scenario in which the effective period of the frame button 22 is set, the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be effective. Further, in the SW scenario, movable data of the spherical characters 330 and 340 are also set, and timings of moving the characters and the like are set to coincide with the start timing of the SW effective time.

  In the process of S1507, a notice effect is selected (S1507), a notice effect command for display indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1508), and the process is ended. When the SW effect is selected, the advance effect may not be selected, and the advance effect may not be executed. As a result, the SW effect and the advance effect are not simultaneously performed, and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player. Moreover, when SW production | presentation and preliminary | backup production | presentation are performed simultaneously, you may comprise so that the expectation of the jackpot which each suggests may become the same or may approximate. Thereby, for example, while a high expectation is performed in the SW production, while a low expectation is executed in the advance production, it is suppressed that the gaming machine is difficult for the player to understand can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the background change extraction process (S1403) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the background change lottery process (S1403).

  In this background change lottery process, it is first determined whether the continuous background flag 223 q is on (S 1601). If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223 q is on (S 1601: Yes), since background change data is already set for the holding ball, the background change lottery is not performed, and the process proceeds to S 1602. . In the process of S1602, it is determined whether the current background level is "level 4" (S1602). If it is determined that the current background level is "level 4" (S1602: Yes), there is no need to change the background level, and the process ends. If it is determined that the current background level is not the background of "level 4" (S1602: No), the process proceeds to S1605.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the continuous background flag 223q is off (S1601: No), background change data is not set for the holding ball, and a lottery for background change is made, so It transfers to the process of S1603. In the process of S1603, it is determined whether or not the hit pseudo fluctuation is a change pattern of one time (1603), and when it is determined that the hit pseudo change is not a change pattern of one time (S1603: No), S1606 Move to the process of On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit pseudo fluctuation is one fluctuation pattern (S1603: Yes), it is determined whether the current background level is level 2 or less (S1604).

  If it is determined in the process of S1604 that the current background level is equal to or lower than level 2 (S1604: No), the process proceeds to S1605. If it is determined in step S1604 that the current background level is level 3 or higher (S1604: NO), the process proceeds to step S1606.

  When the process of S1602 or S1604 is finished, a background to which one level is added is set, and the process proceeds to S1609.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1606 executed after the process of S1603 or S1604, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1606), and the background lottery table 222d is selected based on the result of the determination of acceptance or rejection and the value of the effect counter 223j. Is executed (S1607). After that, it is determined whether there is a change in the background (S1608), and if there is no change in the background (S1608: No), the processing ends as it is, and if there is a change in the background (S1608: Yes) Transfer to processing.

  In the process of S1609, the set background flag 223q is set to ON (S1609), a display background change command indicating the set background is set (S1610), and this process is ended. By setting the display background change command, the background set in the display control device 114 is changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the winning command processing (S1410) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the winning command process (S1410). The winning command processing (S1410) is executed in the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1410 in FIG. 90), and continuously receives a winning command. It is determined whether to start the effect of changing the background.

  In the winning command process, first, winning information based on the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 (S1701), and it is determined whether the continuous background flag 223p is on (S1702). If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is on (1702: Yes), this processing ends. If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is off (S1702: No), it is determined whether there is a hit in the other winning information (S1703). If it is determined that there is a hit in the other winning information (S1703: Yes), it is a big hit before the start winning based on the winning is executed, and the effect of continuously changing the background can not be executed. Finish. If it is determined that the other winning combination information is not hit (S1703: No), it is next determined whether or not the pass / fail determination is a win (S1704). If it is determined that the judgment is not a hit (S1704: No), the present process ends. If it is determined that the pass / fail judgment is a hit (1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1705.

  In the process of S1705, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired, and it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of "0 to 49" (S1706). If it is not within the range of “1706: No”, this processing ends. In the process of S1706, if the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of "0 to 49" (S1706: Yes), background change data is set for each holding ball (S1707), and then the continuous background flag 223p Is set to ON (S1708), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the jackpot command processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S1412). This jackpot command processing (S1412) is executed in the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1412 in FIG. 90), and when a jackpot-related command is received, It is a process for determining the display mode of the ending effect.

  In this control example, when it is determined in the main control unit 110 that "a big hit in a special symbol", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state after the variation effect corresponding to the "big hit in a special symbol" is finished. In the third symbol display device 81, a jackpot effect is started. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the opening effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, first, an opening effect is performed, and it is informed to the player that the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state from this. Next, while the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the special game state, a round effect is started, and every time a new round is started, the number of rounds of this time is informed to the player. Then, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) is ended, an ending effect is performed, and the end of the special gaming state is notified to the player. In this control example, when this ending effect is performed, the fixed effect display informing that there is a start winning to be a “big hit of a special symbol” among the held start winnings, or is being executed When notifying a short period of time of a normal symbol corresponding to the "big hit of a special symbol", a short-term display is performed.

  In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1801). If it is determined in the process of S1801 that the opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), information on the open / close pattern of the open / close pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the open / close pattern storage area 223k (S1802 And an opening command for display is set (S1803), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1801 that the opening command has not been received (S1801: No), it is determined whether a round start command has been received (S1804). If it is determined that the round start command has been received (S1804: Yes), a display round command is set (S1805), and the in-round flag 223m is set to ON (S1806). Thereafter, it is determined whether the received command is a command for the first round (S1807). If it is determined that the present is the first round (S1807: Yes), the big hit effective flag 223e is set to ON (S1808), and this processing is ended. Also, in the process of S1807, even when it is determined that the present time is not the first round (S1807: No), the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1804 that a round start command has not been received (S1804: No), it is determined whether a round end command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that the round end command has been received (S1809: Yes), the in-round flag 223m is set to OFF (S1810), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1809 that the round end command has not been received (S1809: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S1811). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S 1811: Yes), the display ending command is set (S 1812), 1 is added to the value of the remaining counter 223 h (S 1813), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1811 that the ending command has not been received (S1811: No), it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223h is larger than 0 (S1814). If it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 0 (S1814: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1814 that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1 or more (S1814: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than or equal to a value indicating 5 seconds. (S1815). Specifically, since the remaining counter 223h is incremented by one each time the jackpot command processing executed every 4 ms is executed, it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1250 or more. .

  If it is determined in the process of S1815 that the value of the remaining counter 223h is smaller than the value indicating 5 seconds (S1815: No), it means that 5 seconds have not elapsed since the end of the jackpot game, so the remaining counter One is added to the value of 223h (S1816), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1815 that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 5 seconds or more (S1815: Yes), it means that 5 seconds have passed since the end of the big hit game, so Then, the value of the timing change counter is reset (S1817), and then the value of the remaining counter 223h is reset (S1818), the big hit effective flag 223e is set to OFF (S1819), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the jackpot winning process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the jackpot winning process (S1414). This jackpot winning process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 90), and the first entering command from the main control device 110 Alternatively, the process is executed when the second entering command is received.

  In the jackpot winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effective flag 223e is on (S1901). When it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot effective flag 223e is off (S1901: No), although it is not in the jackpot game, entering the first specified winning opening 650a or the second specified winning opening 650b Since there is a ball, an error notification is issued (S1906), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1901 that the big hit effective flag 223e is on (S1901: Yes), it is then determined whether the first entering command is received (S1902). In the process of S1902, if it is determined that the first entry command has been received (S1902: Yes), the game ball enters the first specified winning opening 650a, so an effect based on the entry is determined. In order to execute, the first entry flag 223 f is set to ON (S 1903), and the process proceeds to the processing of S 1904. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first entering command is not received (S1902: No), the process of S1903 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1904.

  When the process of S1902 or S1903 is finished, it is then determined whether the second entering command has been received (S1904). If it is determined in the process of S1904 that the second entry command has been received (S1904: Yes), the game ball enters the second specified winning opening 650b, so an effect based on the entry is determined. In order to execute, the second entering flag 223 f is set to ON (S 1905), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1904 that the second entry command has not been received (S1904: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307). This frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process, first, it is determined whether a SW scenario is set in the SW scenario setting area 223 o (S 2001). If it is determined that there is no setting of the SW scenario (S2001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a setting of the SW scenario (S2001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S2002), and bonus character movable data set in the updated scenario is set (S2003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the present time is the SW effective period (S2004). If it is determined that the SW effective period is not present (S2004: No), the process proceeds to S2007. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2004 that the SW is the valid period (S2004: No), it is determined whether the SW is pressed (S2005). If it is determined that the SW is pressed (S2005: Yes), a display pressing command indicating that the SW is pressed is set (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If it is determined in the process of S2005 that the SW is not pressed (S2005: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2007.

  In the process of S2007, it is determined whether the updated SW scenario is end data of the SW scenario (S2007). If it is determined that it is not the end data of the SW scenario (S2007: No), the present processing is ended as it is, and if it is determined that it is the end data of the SW scenario (S2007: Yes) Since it is the end timing, the value of the SW scenario setting area 223o is reset (S2008), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1313). This variation display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S2101: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2107. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2102), and then, in the process of S1502 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (see FIG. 91) The variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, based on the selected fluctuation pattern, a display fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2104). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the bonus item movement data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area (S2106), and the process proceeds to the process of S2107. The bonus item movement data set by the process of S2106 is referred to by the bonus item movement process (S1311 in FIG. 89), and based on the bonus item movement data set, the action and frame of the spherical bonus article (330, 340) The lighting operation of the button 22 is set.

  In the process of S2107, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2107). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2107: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2107: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S2108), and then in the process of S1406 in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2109).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2110), and display is performed based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying the control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2111). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of pseudo fluctuation (S2112). If it is judged that the fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern of pseudo fluctuation (S2112: No), this processing is ended as it is . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2112 that the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of pseudo fluctuation (S2112), the background flag 223q to which the background level corresponding to the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is added is set ON (S2113) This process ends.

  Here, when the pseudo change is performed, the display data set in the display control device 114 is set so that one background level is raised in advance. As a result, there is no need to monitor the temporary stop timing in the pseudo fluctuation and raise (change) the background level, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Although the description is omitted in this control example, usually, in the case of executing the variation of the special symbol, effects such as display of characters and comments indicating the degree of expectation of various jackpots and sounds are executed in the gaming machine. In such a configuration, since the notice display mode indicating various different degrees of expectation is displayed, the player does not know which degree of expectation to look at and determines the degree of expectation to the jackpot, and the notice display indicating the degree of expectation There is a problem that you lose interest or you get bored early in the game without understanding the contents of the notice. However, in the present control example, since the background level is displayed on the background screen as the overall expectation while changing the special symbol, it is possible to play the game with reference to the expectation. Therefore, the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the background level is changed every time the pseudo stop in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, it is understood that the overall expectation is changed from the expectation in the notice of the false stop. Is easy to understand and can play the game.

  In the present embodiment, the background level is changed by performing the pseudo stop, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the background level is changed based on the display of a notice such as a character or a comment. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, it is possible to display the expectation level by changing the color of the third pattern, for example, and to always display the character showing the general expectation level, instead of displaying the general expectation level at the background level. Then, the display mode of the character may be changed (for example, the pattern, the color, etc. of the clothes may be changed) so as to represent the overall expectation.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the background level is configured to be displayed not only in the case of the change but also when the change is stopped and the next change is started. By comprising in this way, it was comprised so that the degree of expectation of the number of times by which the 3rd design is temporarily stopped can be changed. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol is started with the background level being 3, the temporary stop is performed once, and the fluctuation mode with high expectation to the jackpot is displayed. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game by always being aware of what the background level is.

  Moreover, in this control example, the background level is used as the comprehensive expectation when the pseudo stop is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the variable display when the pseudo stop is not performed, the current mode state is It may be configured to display by level. In this case, the table of the variation mode selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed without changing the fluctuation time notified from the main control device 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.) Configure to change the mode (for example, in the background level 1, the variation mode of single display where the display area is not divided, in the background level 2, the display area is divided into two, and the third symbol is displayed independently on each of them In the variation pattern of the double display mode, background level 3 is similarly divided into three, and a multi-display mode in which the third symbol is variably displayed. By configuring in this way, the display of the background level indicates the degree of expectation by the content of the variation pattern of the special symbol (whether or not the temporary stop variation is made), and the variation pattern selection mode is indicated. It can be switched.

  Furthermore, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the background level may be configured to vary the frequency of rising and the range of rising and the frequency and frequency of falling and the like depending on the gaming state such as the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. . Furthermore, as the background level is higher, it may be easier to select a variation pattern in which a pseudo stop (temporary stop) is performed. On the contrary, the lower the background level, the easier the pseudo stop may be performed. Furthermore, when the background level is previously set to the fluctuation pattern to be variably displayed, and the fluctuation pattern is to be variably displayed, it may be configured to be set to the set background level.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the jackpot effect processing (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle effect processing (S1314). The jackpot middle effect processing (S1314) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot middle effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effective flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2201). When it is determined that the jackpot effective flag 223e is off (S2201: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit effective flag 223e is on (S2201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2202), and it is determined whether the entrance sensor 900a is on. (S2203). When it is determined that the entrance sensor 900a is off (S2203: No), the processing of S2204 and S2205 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to the processing of S2206. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2203 that the entrance sensor 900a is on (S2203: Yes), the entrance passing process is executed (S2204), a display appearance command is set (S2205), and the process of S2206 Transition to Further, the details of the entrance passing process (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2206, it is determined whether the bypass sensor 900b is on (S2206). If it is determined that the bypass sensor 900b is off (S2206: No), the process of S2207 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the bypass sensor 900b is on (S2206: Yes), a display escape command is set (S2207), and the process proceeds to the process of S2208.

  In the process of S2208, it is determined whether the exit sensor 900c is on (S2208). If it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is off (S2208: No), the process of S2209 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2210. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2208 that the exit sensor 900c is on (S2208: Yes), a display failure command is set (S2209), and the process proceeds to the process of S2210.

  In the process of S2210, it is determined whether the first entering flag 223f is on (S2210). If it is determined that the first entering flag 223f is off (S2210: No), the processing of S2211 and S2212 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2210 that the first entering flag 223f is on (S2210: Yes), the first entering flag 223f is set off (S2211), and the display capture command is set. (S2212), the process proceeds to S2213.

  In the process of S2213, it is determined whether the second entering flag 223g is on (S2213). When it is determined that the second entering flag 223g is off (S2213: No), the processing of S2214 and S2215 is skipped, and the present processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2213 that the second entering flag 223g is on (S2213: Yes), the second entering flag 223g is set off (S2214), and the display recapture command is issued. The setting is made (S2215), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the entrance passing process (S2204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing this entrance passing process (S2204). This entrance passing process (S2204) is executed in the jackpot inside effect process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the entrance passing process, it is first determined whether the in-round flag 223m provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301), and if it is determined that the in-round flag 223m is off (S2301: No), This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the during-round flag 223m is on (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S2302).

  When it is determined in the process of S2302 that the jackpot type is not A (S2302: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is A (S2302: Yes), the passage timing is determined based on the information of the open / close pattern storage area 223k and the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2303).

  Next, it is determined whether the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304). If it is determined that the passage timing is not the exit passage timing (S2304: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the exit timing counter 223n (S2305), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is greater than 10 It is determined whether or not (S2306).

  If it is determined in the process of S2306 that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is 10 or less (S2306: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is larger than 10 (S2306: Yes), a display timing notification command is set (S2307), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is reset (S2308) , End this process.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in this control example. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2401) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2501). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2502, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2502, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2503). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2504), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 100). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) (S2505), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2401) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2502. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2501. And after repeating the process of S2502 several times including the process of S2503, you may make it perform the process of S2503-S2505.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in this control example, a case was described in which a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2503 to S2505 without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2403, next, the power on change image is generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2404). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2404, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S2405). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 120A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S4802 in FIG. 120A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. As a result, during this time, a simple command is made so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 72 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)). Determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 102B) and simplified display setting processing (see S2709 in FIG. 102B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is from the main control unit 110 by the voice lamp control device In the case where the display variation pattern command is received via the display 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and (c) is displayed immediately during the variation presentation period, which is simple Can produce various fluctuation effects. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2406, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 76) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image as shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2702) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2703) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2702), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 116.

  In the display setting process (S2703), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702) etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2704). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2703) or the simple display setting processing (S2709) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 is notified of continuous notification even when a continuous notification command or a back surface change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the effect and the image data of the back image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2704), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2705) 76 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2707, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance) The stop type table corresponding to the eye and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 72 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2708) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2709) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 116, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2702) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2801: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes), the new command flag to notify display setting processing (see FIG. 117) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S2802). For all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2803).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2804), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2805), the process returns to the process of S2801.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2805) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2901).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2901, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in this control example, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the process of S2901 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2904), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2905, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901 At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2902. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2904, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2804 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2806), If there is a display variation type command (S2806: Yes), the stop type command processing is executed (S2807), and the processing returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2807) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S3001), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S3002).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3002 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to OFF (S3003), and this processing ends.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S3002 is described. In the above task process (see S2704 in FIG. 102 (b)), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3003 The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S3002.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present control example, in fact, if it is "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2806 that there is no display stop type command (S2806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S2808) If there is a jackpot related command for display (S2808: Yes), a jackpot display process is executed (S2809), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

  Here, the details of the jackpot display process (S2809) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process. The jackpot display process is a process corresponding to the jackpot related command for display received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot display process (S2809), first, it is determined whether a display opening command has been received (S3101). If it is determined in the process of S3101 that the display opening command has been received (S3101: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the display opening command has not been received (S3101: No), the process of S3102 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3103.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S3102) will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (a). FIG. 106A is a flowchart showing the opening command process (S3102). The opening command process (S3102) is to execute a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process (S3102), first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3205), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. When the process of S3101 or S3102 is finished, it is determined whether or not the display round number command has been received (S3103). If it is determined in the process of S3103 that the display round number command has been received (S3103: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3104), and the process shifts to the process of S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3103 that the display round number command has not been received (S3103: No), the process of S3104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3105.

  Here, the round number command processing will be described (S3104) with reference to FIG. 106 (b). FIG. 106 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S3301). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3305), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. When the processing of S3103 or S3104 is finished, it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3105). In the process of S3105, if there is a display ending command (S3105: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3105 that there is no display ending command (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3107.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 3401). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3402). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the process of S3401 is turned on, The data table determination flag corresponding to the other ending display data table is set to off (S3403). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d corresponds to the display mode of which ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S 3403. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3406), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. When the processing of S3105 or S3106 is finished, it is then determined whether or not there is a command related to entering ball among the unprocessed commands (S3107). If it is determined in the process of S3107 that there is a ball entry related command (S3107: Yes), a ball entering effect process is executed (S3108), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no entry-related command (S3107: No), the process of S3108 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the ball entering effect processing (S3108) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the ball entering effect process (S3108). The ball entering effect processing is to execute processing corresponding to the ball entering related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In this ball entering effect processing (S3108), first, it is determined whether or not a display appearance command has been received (S3501). If it is determined in the process of S350 that the appearance command for display has been received (S3501: Yes), an appearance effect process is executed (S3502), and the process proceeds to S3503. The details of the appearance effect process (S3502) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display appearance command is not received in the process of S3501, the process of S3502 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3503.

  When the process of S3501 or S3502 ends, it is then determined whether a display escape command is received (S3503). If it is determined in the process of S3503 that the display escape command is received (S3503: Yes), an escape effect process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505. The details of the escape production process (S3504) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3503 that the display escape command is not received (S3503: No), the process of S3504 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505.

  When the process of S3504 or S3505 is finished, it is then determined whether a display failure command has been received (S3505). If it is determined in the process of S3505 that the display failure command has been received (S3505: Yes), a failure presentation process is executed (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. About the details of this failure presentation processing (S3506). This will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3505 that the display failure command has not been received (S3505: No), the process of S3506 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3507.

  When the process of S3505 or S3506 is completed, it is then determined whether a display capture command has been received (S3507). If it is determined in the process of S3507 that the display capture command has been received (S3507: Yes), a capture effect process is executed (S3508), and the process moves to S3509. The details of the capture effect process (S3508) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display capture command is not received in the process of S3507 (S3507: No), the process of S3508 is skipped. Transfer to the processing of S3509.

  When the process of S3507 or S3508 is finished, it is then determined whether a display recapture command has been received (S3509). If it is determined in the process of S3509 that the display recapture command has been received (S3509: Yes), the recapture presentation process is executed (S3510), and the process ends. The details of the recapture effect process (S3510) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3509 that the display recapture command has not been received (S3509: No), the process of S3510 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Here, details of the appearance effect process (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the appearance effect process (3102). This appearance effect process (S3502) executes the process corresponding to the display appearance command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the game ball enters the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 during the big hit game. It is a process for executing the effect in the case of having been.

  In the appearance effect process (S3502), first, it is determined whether or not the appearance effect in-progress flag 233m is on (S3601). If it is determined in the process of S3601 that the appearance effect flag is on (S3601), since the appearance effect is already executed (see FIG. 57A), the appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 (S3601). S3602) A display data table corresponding to the value of the appearing counter 233n after the addition is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3603). When the process of S3603 ends, the process moves to the process of S3609. By the processing of S3602 and S3603, the patterns (see FIGS. 57 to 59) of cats in the cat appearing number displayed during the jackpot game are displayed by being increased by one.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3601 that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3601: No), it is then determined whether the escapement counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3604). In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the escapement counter 233p is 0 (S3604: No), since neither the appearance effect nor the escape effect is displayed, it corresponds to the normal appearance effect A display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3605).

  The normal appearance effect set by the process of S3605 is an effect in which the effect during the big hit game is displayed on one screen as described above, and one of the appearance effect and the escape effect is displayed. It is displayed. In this control example, as effects in the big hit game, two types of effects of appearance effect and escape effect are configured to be simultaneously displayed by dividing the screen of the third symbol display device 81 into two. However, in the case where only one of the appearance effect and the escape effect should be displayed, only the appearance effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen by the normal appearance effect set by the process of S3605. Since it is possible for the player to make the game machine easy to understand.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3604 that the escapement counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3604: Yes), the appearance effect is not displayed but the escape effect is displayed, so the special appearance effect is displayed. The display data table corresponding to is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). Thereby, it is possible to switch from the state in which only escape production is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen to the state in which appearance and escape effects are simultaneously displayed.

  When the process of S4705 or S4706 is finished, the appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON (S4707), the appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709.

  When the processing of S4703 or S4708 is finished, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3609). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the S display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3610), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3611) . Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3612), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the escape production process (S3504) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the escape production process (S3504). This escape production processing executes processing corresponding to the display escape command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the gaming ball that entered the specific winning device 650 during the big hit game flows into the bypass flow path 653. It is a process for executing the effect in the case of having been.

  In the escape production process (S3504), first, the appearance counter 233n is decremented by 1 (S3701), and it is determined whether the appearance counter 233n after the subtraction is 0 or not (S3702). If it is determined in the process of S3702 that the appearing counter 233n is 0 (S3702: Yes), the appearing effect to be displayed disappears, so the appearing production flag 233m is set to OFF (S3703), and the process of S3704 is performed. Transition to On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3702 that the appearing counter 233n is not 0, there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3703 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3704.

  When the process of S3702 or S3703 is completed, it is determined whether the in-flight counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3704). If it is determined in the process of S3704 that the escapement counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3704: Yes), the escapement counter 233p is incremented by 1 (S3705), and the added value corresponds to the value of the escapement counter 233p. The display data table thus determined is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S3706), and the process proceeds to the processing of S3711. By the processing of S3705 and S3706, a cat's pattern (see FIGS. 57 to 59) is displayed by 1 within the number of escapes displayed during the big hit game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3704 that the escapement counter 233p is 0 (S3704: No), the escapement counter 233p is incremented by 1 (S3707), and it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on. It is determined whether or not it is (S3708). If it is determined in the process of S3708 that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3708: No), since there is no appearance effect to be displayed, the display data table corresponding to the normal escape behavior is determined and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 3709), and the process proceeds to the process of S 3711.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3708 that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3708: Yes), since there is an appearance effect to be displayed, the display data table corresponding to the special runaway effect is determined. It sets to the display data table buffer 233d (S3710), and it transfers to the process of S3711.

  The normal escape performance described above is an effect for displaying the escape effect on the third symbol display device 81 in one screen, and the special escape effect is for displaying the escape effect and the appearance effect in two screens on the third symbol display device 81 Effect (see FIG. 57 (b)).

  When the processing of S3706, S3709 or S3710 is finished, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3711). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3712), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3714), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, the details of the failure presentation process (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing failure effect processing (S3506). This failure effect processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display failure command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the gaming ball having entered the specified winning device 650 during the big hit game is the first specified winning opening 650a. The second special winning opening 650b is a process for executing effects when passing through the exit portion 652c without entering any of the second special winning opening 650b.

  In the failure effect process (S3506), first, the runaway counter 223p is decremented by 1 (S3801), and it is determined whether the appearance effect flag 233m is on or not (S3802). If it is determined in the process of S3802 that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3802: No), since there is no appearance effect to be displayed, the display data table corresponding to the normal failure effect is determined The display data table buffer 233d is set (S3803), and the process proceeds to the processing of S3805. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3802 that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3802: Yes), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, and it is a case where effect display on two screens is performed. The display data table corresponding to the effect is determined, and the display data table buffer 233 dn is set (S3804), and the process shifts to the processing of S3805.

  When the process of S3803 or S3804 is finished, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3805). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3806), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3807). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3808), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, the details of the capture effect process (S3508) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the capture effect process (S3508). This capture effect process is to execute a process corresponding to the display capture command received from the sound lamp control process 113, and the gaming ball having entered the specified winning device 650 during the big hit game is the first specified winning opening 650a. It is a process for executing an effect when entering the ball.

  In the capture effect process (S3506), first, the capture counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S3901), and the appearing counter 233n is decremented by 1 (S3902). Next, it is determined whether the appearance counter 233 n decremented by the process of S3902 is 0 or not (S3903). If it is determined in the process of S3903 that the appearing counter 233n is 0, there is no appearing effect to be displayed, so the appearing effect flag 233m is turned off (S3904), and the process shifts to the process of S3905. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3903 that the appearing counter 233n is not 0 (S3903: No), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3904 is skipped to shift to the process of S3905.

  When the process of S3903 or S3904 is finished, it is then determined whether the in-flight counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3905). In the process of S3905, when it is determined that the escapement counter 233p is 0 (S3905: No), the capture counter is normally displayed to execute capture effect on one screen without the escape effect being displayed. A display data table corresponding to the capture effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3905 that the escapement counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3905: Yes), there is an escape effect being displayed and there is a capture counter to execute capture effect on two screens. A display data table corresponding to the special capture effect shown is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S3907), and the process proceeds to the processing of S3908.

  When the processing of S3906 or S3907 ends, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3908). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3909), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3910). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3911), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, details of the recapture effect process (S3510) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the recapture effect process (S3510). This recapture effect process 113 is to execute a process corresponding to the display recapture command received from the sound lamp control process 113, and the game ball entered into the specified winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the second specified It is a process for executing a process when entering the winning opening 650b.

  In the recapture effect process (S3510), first, the runaway counter 233p is decremented by 1 (S4001), and the recapture counter 233s is incremented by 1 (S4002). Next, it is determined whether the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003). If it is determined in the process of S4003 that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003: No), there is no displayed appearance effect, and in order to execute the recapture effect on one screen, the recapture counter Is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S4004), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4006.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4003 that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003: Yes), there is an appearance effect being displayed, and in order to execute the recapture effect on two screens, The display data table corresponding to the special recapture effect indicating the capture counter is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006.

  When the process of S4004 or S4005 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4006). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4007), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4008). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S4009), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2808 that there is no jackpot related command for display (S2808: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display timing notification command among the unprocessed commands (S2810) If there is a display timing notification command (S2810: Yes), the timing notification process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the timing notification process (S2811) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the timing notification process (S2811). The timing notification process (S 2811) is to execute a process corresponding to the display timing notification command received from the audio lamp control device 113. This timing notification command is transmitted when the gaming ball entering the specific winning device 650 does not enter the second specific winning opening 650b as described above, and there are many gaming balls passing through the exit portion 652c. is there.

  In the timing notification process (S2811), first, the timing notification display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101), and the transfer data table corresponding to the timing notification display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102). ). Thereafter, based on the timing notification display data table, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S4105), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the timing notification display data table set here, an effect display for changing the firing timing of the gaming ball by the player is set. A specific example is an effect prompting the user to simultaneously press the screen and the frame button 22. In order to simultaneously press the screen and the frame button 22 by this effect, the player needs to release his hand from the firing handle Therefore, the firing timing of the game ball can be changed. By this effect, it is possible to save that the gaming ball having entered the specified winning device 650 is fired at a timing when it is difficult to enter the second specified winning opening 650b, and it is possible to suppress the player from becoming a disadvantage.

  Referring back to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2810 that there is no display timing notification command (S2810: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display background change command among the unprocessed commands (S2812) If there is a display background change command (S2812: Yes), background change command processing is executed (S2813), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the back surface change command processing (S2815) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 (a) is a flowchart showing the back surface change command process. The back surface change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back surface change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back surface change command processing, first, a back surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4803) of the change of the back surface image accompanying the reception of the back surface change command in the on state is set to on (S4201). Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surface A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface change command is turned on. Is set to OFF (S4202), and this back surface change command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S4201 is turned on, the back image type after change is identified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4202. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S4202, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back surface change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In the case where two or more back side change commands are stored in the command buffer area, there should not be a case where some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly interpreted as a back side change command. There is also a possibility that In the process of S4202, when it is determined that two or more back side change commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back side image determination flag corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side change command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back surface change command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Referring back to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2812 that there is no back surface change command (S2812: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a notice rendering command among the unprocessed commands (S2814), and the notice rendering command is If there is (S2814: Yes), the advance presentation command process is executed (S2815), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116, the details of the advance presentation command processing (S2815) will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the notice effect command processing (S2815). The preview rendering command process (S2815) is to execute a process corresponding to the preview rendering command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the preview effect command process (S2815), first, it is determined whether a display SW effect command has been received (S4401). If it is determined in the process of _S4401 that the display SW effect command has been received (S4401: Yes), the SW effect display data table indicated by the received display SW effect command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4402) And the process of S4403. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the display SW effect command has not been received (S4401: No), the process of S4402 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4403. By executing the processing of S4402, the SW effect (FIG. 60, FIG. 61) in the above-described interlocking effect with effects is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the effect pattern of the SW effect displayed by the processing of S4402 is stored in the SW scenario setting area 223o in the RAM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the lighting and opening / closing operation of the spherical part (330, 340) whose operation is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be interlocked.

  When the process of S4401 or S4402 is finished, it is then determined whether or not a display preview effect command has been received (S4403). If it is determined in the process of S4403 that the display preview effect command has been received (S4403: Yes), the preview effect display data table indicated by the received display preview effect command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4404) ), Shift to the processing of S4405. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the display preview effect command is not received (S4403: No), the process of S4404 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4405. The notice effect displayed by the process of S4404 is, for example, a notice effect that does not require an operation of the frame button 22, such as an effect that a character appears.

  When the process of S4403 or S4404 is finished, it is then determined whether a display pressing command has been received (S4405). If it is determined in the process of S4405 that the display pressing command has been received (S4405: Yes), the notice display data table corresponding to the set effect of the SW effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S4406), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4405 that the display pressing command is not received (S4405: No), the process of S4406 is skipped, and the present process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2814 that there is no advance notice command (S2814: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2816), and if there is an error command (S2816: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2817), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2817) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4302). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4301, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4302, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4302, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2816 that there is no error command (S2816: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2818), and the process returns to S2801.

  In the process of S2801 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes ), The processing of S2802 to S2818 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2801 to S2818 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2801 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2709) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 72, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 104 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. The command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 104A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2901, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2703) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 117, it is judged whether or not the new command flag is on (S4501), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4501: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S4502 to S4504 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4505. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4501: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier and the new command flag is set to off (S4502), S4503 to S4504. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S4503, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4503). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4503: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4504).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 118, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4601).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4601, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4602), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4504), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S4503 (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4505.

  In S4505, pointer update processing is executed (S4505). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 4701). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S4701, then in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not Is determined (S4702). As a result, if it is the End information (S4702: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is a demonstration display data table (S 4703), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S 4703: Yes), display data The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4704), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S4705), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4703: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4706), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S4702: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 117, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4506). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4506 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4507), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S4508). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4508: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4508: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S4509).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S4509: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed and the finalized display is performed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S4510), and then the content is cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4511). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4512), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4513). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S4514), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S4515) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4515 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2704), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4515, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4509, if the finalized display flag is not on but off (S4509: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S4516). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S4516: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 4517), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 4518). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4519). Then, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 4520), and a demonstration display flag indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set to on (S 4521), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S4516, if the demonstration display flag is on (S4516: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2709) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 102B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of (FIG. 72 (b) and (c)) in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 120, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2705) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 120A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801: YES), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4802) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4801, that is, if it is off (S4801: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4803), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S4802) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 120 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4802).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S4901), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4901: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer processing of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S 4902). In the process of S4902, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4902 (S4902: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4902: Yes), the process moves to S4903. Also, as a result of the process of S4901, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903.

  In the processing of S4903, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4903), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4903: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4904), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S4903, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S4903: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4905), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 102 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 103 to 115) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are performed, drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 120) (see S4801: No in FIG. 120A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a normal image transfer setting process (S4803) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4803).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4505) of the display setting process (S2703) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S5001). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S5002), and if it is transfer data information (S5002: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S5003), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, is set to on (S5004), and the process proceeds to step S5005.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S5002 (S5002: No), the process of S5003 and S5004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5005. In the process of S5005, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S5005), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S5005: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S5006).

  In the process of S5006, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S5006 (S5006: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S5006: Yes), the process proceeds to S5007. Further, as a result of the process of S5005, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S5005: No), the process proceeds to S5007.

  In the process of S5007, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5007), and if the transfer start flag is on (S5007: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S5008), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5003 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S5017. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5007: No), it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S5013). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S5009: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S5009: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S5010), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S5011). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S5012), and the process proceeds to S5013.

  In the process of S5013, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5013). The determination in the process of S5013 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S5013 (S5013: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5013 (S5013: Yes), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S5014). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S5014, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S5015), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the effect for big hit etc. from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear surface change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear surface image Image data not stored in the area 235 c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2706) which is one process of the V interrupt process performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) From the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 76 is generated (S5101). That is, in the process of S5101, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2704), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5102). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5102, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S5103). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 102B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

<On the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 132, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, when the SW effect is selected based on the fluctuation pattern, the spherical character (330, 340) and the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are interlocked The case of performing the role interlocking effect to produce is described.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern, a case where the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed will be described. Specifically, based on the pressing of the frame button 22 as the SW effect, the comment-based effect that indicates the expectation of the jackpot by the content of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the background of the comment, and the frame Based on the depression of the button 22, a continuous-stroke-based effect that indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is provided. The comment system effect and the continuous system are switched when a predetermined condition is established.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in configuration in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially different. Also, in place of the frame button input monitoring / rendering process performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the frame button input monitoring / rendering process 2 is executed, and the preview effect performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 The process is different in that a part of the command process (S2815) is changed, and the other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the display content of the SW effect displayed in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the SW effect of the comment system effect.

  In the second control example, when the SW effect of the comment system effect is executed, the fluctuation display is reduced and displayed in the lower left portion of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the picture of the PUSH button corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (4 times in this control example) in the SW effect is displayed vertically in the center of the screen. Thereafter, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the picture of the PUSH button is changed to the comment display (see FIG. 123 (a)). The comment display displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 suggests the degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot by the content of the comment and the background of the comment.

  Here, when the comment display which suggests that the degree of expectation to be the jackpot is high is displayed, the comment display displayed based on the subsequent pressing of the frame button 22 is fixed to the one to which the degree of expectation to be the jackpot is high. Ru. For example, after the comment display of the school of fish is displayed based on the first press of the frame button 22, the background of the comment display displayed based on the press of the second and third frame buttons 22 is also the school of fish (See FIG. 123 (b)). As a result, it is possible to improve the player's interest without the degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot falling.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the SW effect of the continuous hitting system effect in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the SW effect of the continuous hitting system effect.

  In the second control example, when the SW effect of the continuous hitting type effect is executed, the fluctuation display is reduced and displayed in the lower left portion of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the SW effect of the comment type effect described above The picture of the PUSH button corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (4 times in this control example) in the SW effect is displayed vertically at the center of the screen. Thereafter, based on the depression of the frame button 22, the pattern of the PUSH button is erased, and instead, a part or all of a specific pattern (in this control example, a pattern of a whale) is displayed (FIG. 124 (FIG. a) see).

  The above-mentioned whale pattern moves from the right side of the screen to the center of the screen based on the depression of the frame button 22. For example, 1⁄4 of the whale pattern is displayed from the right side of the screen based on the first press, and 2⁄4 of the whale pattern is displayed based on the second press, and based on the third press. , 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and all the whale patterns are displayed based on the fourth press (see FIG. 124 (b)). As described above, in the SW presentation of the continuous hitting system presentation, it is suggested that the jackpot is to be made if all the symbols of the whale are displayed, and it is suggested that the jackpot is not made to be otherwise.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the touch effect to be executed when there is a detection by the touch sensor in the SW effect will be described. This touch effect is executed when a high expectation effect of being a big hit is executed by pressing the frame button 22 in the comment-based effect and the continuous-stroke-based effect described above.

  First, in the comment system effect or the continuous hitting system effect described above, the picture of the PUSH button according to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect (four times in this control example) is vertically displayed in the center of the screen ( FIG. 125 (a). After that, when there is a detection by the touch sensor, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the pattern of the PUSH button is displayed on an enlarged scale in which the effect with a high degree of expectation of becoming a big hit is displayed.

  For example, in the comment type effect where the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is four, when a school of fish is displayed as the background of the comment notice when the second frame button 22 is pressed, the second PUSH button from the top The symbol of is enlarged and displayed (FIG. 125 (b)). Here, the display content of the SW effect at each pressing number is determined by prefetching and acquiring it at the start of the SW effect. This makes it possible to notify the player that an effect with a high expectation of becoming a big hit (that is, an effect with a low probability of being displayed) is displayed before the frame button 22 is pressed. It is possible to urge pressing of the button 22.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example.

  First, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (a). As shown in FIG. 126 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a feature interlocking effect table 222b, an opening and closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, and an SW scenario storage area 222e. A SW effect selection table 222f is provided, and in addition, various data, programs and the like necessary for controlling the game are stored. The variation pattern selection table 222a to the SW scenario storage area 222e are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The SW effect selection table 222f defines the display contents of the SW effect of the comment system effect and the continuous action system effect described above, and the hit normal reach time comment background table 222f1, the hit super reach time comment background table 222f2, and the off A time comment background table 222 f 3, a fixed time fixed comment background table 222 f 4, a fixed time fixed comment background table 222 f 5, a comment table 222 f 6, and a continuous hitting system drawing lottery table 222 f 7 are provided at least. A detailed description of each table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129.

  The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). As shown in FIG. 126 (b), a fixed flag 223r and an SW depression counter 223s are provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example, in addition to the respective areas of the first control example described above.

  The fixed flag 223r is set to ON when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is satisfied in the SW effect selection process described later (see FIG. 131). When the fixed flag 223r is set to ON, the SW effect selected in the subsequent SW effect selection process is selected from the fixed table. Thereby, it is possible to prevent switching from the comment system production to the continuous shot system production.

  The present invention is not limited to this, and the fixed flag 223r may be configured to be turned on when it is desired to prevent the effects from being switched in the continuous hitting system effect.

  The SW pressing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed. The SW pressing counter 223s is incremented by one each time the SW rendering selection process is executed, which is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW rendering, and the SW pressing count becomes the upper limit value. If this happens, the SW scenario will be reset.

  Next, the contents of the SW effect selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. First, the contents of the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 127 (a). FIG. 127 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1. The hit normal reach time comment background table 222f1 defines the comment background of the selected comment-based effect when the normal reach is executed with the result of the pass / fail judgment. The comment background is defined to be selected by the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the effect counter.

  Here, as the comment background, the display area of the comment notice display is displayed in blue, “yellow background” displayed in yellow, “yellow background” displayed in red, “red background” displayed in red, and a fish school pattern There is a "Fish School Background" displayed. As a degree of expectation that becomes a jackpot, "yellow background" is higher than "blue background", and "red background" is higher than "yellow background", "Fish school background" has higher expectation than "red background".

  In the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the first, when the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", "blue background" is selected and "300 to 396" In the case of "," "yellow background" is selected, in the case of "397-398", "red background" is selected, and in the case of "399", "fish group background" is selected. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the second, "blue background" is selected if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 249", and "yellow background" if it is "250 to 349". Is selected, "red background" is selected in the case of "350 to 397", and "fish bank background" is selected in the case of "398 to 399". Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the third time, “blue background” is selected when the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 149”, and “yellow background” if “150 to 299”. Is selected, “red background” is selected in the case of “300 to 396”, and “fish group background” is selected in the case of “397 to 399”. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the fourth, "yellow background" is selected when the effect counter 223j is "0 to 249", and "red background" is selected if "250 to 349" In the case of "350 to 399", "fish bank background" is selected and "blue background" is not selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127 (b), the hit super reach comment background table 222 f 2 will be described. FIG. 127 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hit super reach comment background table 222f2. The hit super reach comment background table 222f2 is defined such that a comment background having a high expectation of becoming a big hit is selected as compared with the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 described above.

  In the hit super reach comment table background 222 f 2, when the number of depressions of the frame button 22 is the first, “blue background” is selected when the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 149”, “150 to 150 In the case of 349 "," yellow background "is selected, in the case of" 350 to 397 "," red background "is selected, and in the case of" 398 to 399 "," fish group background "is selected. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the second, "blue background" is selected if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", and "yellow background" if "150 to 299". Is selected, “red background” is selected in the case of “300 to 396”, and “fish group background” is selected in the case of “397 to 399”. Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the third time, "yellow background" is selected if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 249", and "red background" if "250 to 349" Is selected, and in the case of "350 to 399", "Fish school background" is selected, and "blue background" is not selected. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the fourth, “red background” is selected when the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 249”, and “fish group background” is selected if “250 to 399”. And "blue background" and "yellow background" are not selected.

  Thus, the hit super reach comment background table 222f2 is defined such that a comment background having a high expectation of becoming a big hit is easily selected as compared with the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1. Thereby, in the comment system production of the super reach, it is possible to be easy to be displayed a thing with high expectation which will be a jackpot as compared to the normal reach. In the present control example, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the same (four times) for super reach and normal reach, but the invention is not limited thereto, and the number of times the frame button 22 is normally pressed may be reduced. . As a result, even if background display is selected using the same table for super reach and normal reach, the area of the ROM 222 is configured to be more likely to produce a high-performing effect of being a big hit compared to normal reach. It can be saved.

  Next, the contents of the out-of-time comment background table 222f3 will be described with reference to FIG. 128 (a). FIG. 128 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the out-of-time comment background table 222f3. The out-of-comment comment background table 222f3 is defined such that a comment background having a low probability of becoming a jackpot is selected as compared to the above-described hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 and the hit super reach comment background table 222f2. .

  When the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time, “blue background” is selected when the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 349”, and “350 to 396” In the case of, “yellow background” is selected, in the case of “397 to 398”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “399”, “fish group background” is selected. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the second, "blue background" is selected if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", and "yellow background" if "300 to 396" Is selected, "red background" is selected in the case of "397-398", and "fish bank background" is selected in the case of "399". Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the third time, “blue background” is selected when the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 249”, and “yellow background” if “250 to 349”. Is selected, "red background" is selected in the case of "350 to 398", and "fish group background" is selected in the case of "399". When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the fourth, "blue background" is selected when the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", and "yellow background" is selected if "150 to 349". In the case of “350 to 397”, “red background” is selected, and in the case of “398 to 399”, “fish group background” is selected.

  Next, the contents of the out-of-time fixed comment background table 222f4 will be described with reference to FIG. 128 (b). FIG. 128 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the out-of-time fixed comment background table 222f4. The fixed comment background table 222f4 at the time of departure is used for selecting a comment-based effect when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is satisfied and the fixed flag 223r is turned on (S6103 in FIG. 131). Further, the out-time fixed comment background table 222f4 defines a comment background to be selected based on the previous background type and the effect counter 223j.

  Specifically, when the type of the previous comment background is “red background”, “red background” is selected when the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 7”, and “red background” is selected. In the case of "8 to 9", "fish group background" is selected. If the type of the previous comment background is "fish school background", then "fish school background" is selected if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 9" (that is, in all cases) . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is established, the expectation of becoming a big hit suggested by the comment background does not decrease, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the hit fixed comment background table 222f5 will be described with reference to FIG. 128 (c). FIG. 128C is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the hit fixed comment background table 222f5. The per-time fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the fixed condition of the comment system effect is satisfied, as in the case of the off-time fixed comment background table 222f4. Unlike the out-of-time fixed comment background table 222f4 used when the pass / fail determination result is out, the hit / fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the pass / fail determination result is a hit.

  Specifically, when the type of the previous comment background is “red background”, “red background” is selected when the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 3”, and “red background” is selected. In the case of "4 to 9", "Fish school background" is selected. If the type of the previous comment background is "fish school background", then "fish school background" is selected if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 9" (that is, in all cases) . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is established, the expectation of becoming a big hit suggested by the comment background does not decrease, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the comment table 222f6 will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (a). FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the comment table 222f6. The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice displayed in the comment-based effect described above.

  The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice to be displayed based on the background type and the effect counter 223j. Specifically, when the background type is "blue background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "do best" is selected as the content of the comment notice, " In the case of 4 to 6 "," still "is selected as the content of the comment notice, in the case of" 7 to 8 ", the" imitation "is selected as the content of the comment notice, and in the case of" 9 ", the comment "More" is selected as the content of the notice. When the background type is "yellow background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "chance?" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and "4 to 4". In the case of 6 "," Oya? "Is selected as the content of the comment preview, and in the case of" 7 to 8 ", the content of the comment preview is selected, and in the case of" 9 " As the content of the comment notice, "Mr. me?" Is selected. Furthermore, when the background type is "red background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "chance!" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and "4 to 4" In the case of 6 "," Yoshi! "Is selected as the content of the comment notice, in the case of" 7 to 8 "," Good! "Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and in the case of" 9 ", the comment "Sore!" Is selected as the content of the notice. Also, when the background type is "fish school background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "big chance !!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and " In the case of 4 to 6 "," Yoshi! "Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and in the case of" 7 to 8 "," Wow !! "is selected as the content of the comment notice, and" 9 " In some cases, "super heat !!" is selected as the content of the comment notice.

  As described above, since the content of the comment notice to be displayed is selected based on the background type, the expectation of becoming a jackpot suggested by the contents of the comment notice and the comment background can be made to coincide with each other. It can be a machine. In addition, although the background of the comment and the content of the comment notice are selected based on the effect counter 223j, in selecting the content of the comment notice, it is selected based on the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j. ing. As a result, the content of the comment background and the content of the comment notice can be selected at random, and the number of variations displayed in the comment system can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In this control example, although the content of the comment notice is selected based on the type of the comment background, the present invention is not limited to this, and the content of the comment notice is selected regardless of the type of the comment background May be In addition, after selecting the content of the comment preview first, the type of the comment background may be selected based on the content of the comment preview.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129 (b), the contents of the continuous hitting series effect lottery table 222f7 will be described. FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the continuous hitting series effect lottery table 222 f 7. The continuous hitting system effect lottery table 222f7 defines whether or not a specific pattern is displayed, based on the result of determination of the success or failure, the number of depressions of the frame button 22, and the value of the effect counter 223j.

  Specifically, if the result of the judgment is a hit, and the number of depressions of the frame button 22 is the first, if the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 199”, the pattern of the whale which is a specific pattern is 1 / 4 is displayed (see FIG. 124 (a)), and is not displayed if it is "200 to 399". When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the picture of the whale is displayed 2/4, and if it is "150 to 399", the previous time It will remain on the display. Furthermore, in the case where the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the third time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 119", the symbol of the whale is displayed 3/4 and if it is "120 to 399", the previous time It will remain on the display. In addition, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the fourth time, if the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 99”, all the symbols of the whale are displayed and it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit (FIG. 124 (b If it is “100 to 399”, the previous display remains. Here, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the fourth time, the value of the effect counter 223 j is “100 to 399”, and when all the symbols of the whale are not displayed, it has been a big hit separately thereafter It is informed.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination is out of step, and the number of depressions of the frame button 22 is the first, if the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 199”, the symbol of the whale which is a specific symbol is displayed 1/4 (See FIG. 124 (a)), and if it is "200 to 399", it is not displayed. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223 j is “0 to 99”, the picture of the whale is displayed 2/4, and if it is “100 to 399”, the previous time It will remain on the display. Furthermore, in the case where the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the third time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 49", the symbol of the whale is displayed 3/4, and if "50 to 399" It will remain on the display. In addition, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the fourth time, regardless of the value of the effect counter 223j, the previous display remains and the notification of the big hit is not displayed.

  As described above, in the comment system effect, the player recognizes the content and the degree of expectation of the jackpot by reading the content of the comment, while in the case of the continuous effect system, the player has a specific pattern In the control example, it is sufficient to pay attention to whether or not all the symbols of the whale are displayed, and therefore, the comment-based presentation has to make the presentation period longer than the double-stroke presentation. In this control example, when the SW effective time is shortened by the processing of S6104 described later, a continuous hit system effect that can be recognized by the player even for a short time effect is displayed. This makes it possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to understand.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is replaced by the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and the frame button input monitoring / rendering process 2 (S1350) Is different in that it is implemented, and otherwise identical. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 130, the details of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (S1350) will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (S1350). The frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (S1350) is a process that is executed when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 and the SW rendering is selected.

  In this frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (S1350), first, it is determined whether or not there is a SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S6001). If it is determined in the process of S6001 that there is a SW scenario (S6001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S6002), and it is determined whether it is the SW effective period based on the updated SW scenario (S6001) S6003). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6001 that there is no SW scenario (S6001: No), since the SW effect is not being executed, the present process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S6003 that it is the SW effective period (S6003: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S6004), and the process proceeds to S6005. The value of the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S6004 is used in the SW effect selection process (S6006) described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6003 that the period is not the SW effective period (S6003: No), it is not the timing to execute the effect based on the SW depression, and the process ends.

  In the process of S6005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005: Yes), effects based on the pressing of the frame button 22 are executed For this purpose, SW effect selection processing (S6006) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6005 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed, it is determined whether the touch sensor is on (S6007).

  If it is determined in the process of S6007 that the touch sensor is on (S6007: Yes), a display touch sensor command is set to display the touch effect (see FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above (see S6008), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6007 that the touch sensor is off (S6007: No), the process ends. Here, the display touch sensor command set in the process of S6008 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. ) Are sent to the display controller 114. When receiving the display touch sensor command, the display control device 114 displays the touch effect (refer to FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the details of the SW effect selection process (S6006) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing SW effect selection processing (S6006). The SW effect selection process is a process of selecting an effect to be displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed while the SW effect is being displayed.

  In the SW effect selection process (S6006), first, the SW depression counter 223s is incremented by 1 (S6101), and it is determined whether the fixed flag 223r is on (S6102). If it is determined in the process of S6102 that the fixed flag 223r is on (S6102: Yes), the fixed condition for fixing the SW effect is satisfied, so effects are produced from the fixed table (222f4 or 222f5). Is selected, and the process proceeds to the process of S6110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6102 that the fixed flag 223r is off (S6102: No), the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less based on the SW scenario stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o. It is determined whether there is any (S6104).

  In the process of S6104, when it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S6104: Yes), since the remaining effect period is short, continuous hitting system effects capable of displaying the effect period shorter than comment system effects can be displayed In order to execute, the SW effect is selected based on the effect counter 223 j and the SW depression counter 223 s from the continuous hitting system effect selection table 222 f 7. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than 5 seconds (S6104: No), there is a sufficient remaining rendering period, and the rendering counter 223j is selected from the comment rendering selection table (222f1, 222f2, 222f3, 222f6). The SW effect is selected based on the SW depression counter 223s. Here, as a method of selecting a comment system effect, first, a comment background is selected from the comment background table (222f1 to 222f3) according to the result of determination of propriety and the change pattern type, and thereafter, the selected comment background and the value of the effect counter 223j The content of the notice of comment is selected from the comment table according to and.

  When the process of S6106 is completed, it is then determined whether a fixed condition is satisfied (S6107). Specifically, when the selected comment background is "red background" or "fish school background", it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied. As a result, although a high effect is displayed as the jackpot expectation level, the effect that the player's willingness to play is impaired by subsequently displaying the effect that the jackpot expectation level is extremely low. Can be suppressed. In this control example, the fixed condition is set so that the expectation of the comment background is not lost, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the one having a story as the content of the comment preview (from the first to the fourth The fixed condition may be satisfied when all the contents of the notice are displayed and the contents can be understood. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused by switching to the continuous strike type presentation halfway even though the content of the comment notice having the story nature is displayed.

  If it is determined in the process of S6108 that the fixed condition is satisfied (S6107: Yes), the fixed flag 223r is set to ON (S6109), and the process proceeds to the process of S6110. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6108 that the fixed condition is not satisfied (S6108: No), the process of S6109 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6110.

  In the process of S6110, the display depression effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S6103, S6106 or S6107 is set (S6110), and based on the SW depression counter 223s, the number of SW depressions is the upper limit (in this control example It is determined whether or not it is four times (S6111).

  If it is determined in the process of S6111 that the SW pressing frequency is the upper limit (S6111: Yes), the SW scenario storage area 223o is reset (S6112), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6111 that the SW pressing frequency is not the upper limit value (S6111: No), S6112 is skipped and this process is ended.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Second Control Example
Next, control processing performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is different in that the partial process of the advance notice command (S2815) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first control example is changed, and is otherwise the same. It is. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Details of the advance presentation effect command processing (S2815) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the notice effect command processing (S2815). The preview rendering command process (S2815) is for executing a process corresponding to the preview rendering command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this advance presentation effect command process (S2815), the processes of S4401 to S4405 are executed as in the first control example. If it is determined in the process of S4405 that the display pressing command has been received (S4405: Yes), the notice display data table corresponding to the set effect of the SW effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( In step S4406, the display data table in which the number of times of pressing has been updated is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4450), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that the display pressing command has not been received (S4405: No), the processes of S4406 and S4450 are skipped, and the process ends.

  By the process of S4450, it is possible to execute pressing effects (see FIGS. 123 and 124) according to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. Further, by the processing of S4406, it is possible to switch between continuous hitting system effect and comment system effect based on the press command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

<On the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133 to FIG. 141, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second control example described above, the case where the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is performed when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern has been described. Specifically, based on the pressing of the frame button 22 as the SW effect, the comment-based effect that indicates the expectation of the jackpot by the content of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the background of the comment, and the frame Based on the depression of the button 22, a continuous-stroke-based effect that indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is provided. The comment system effect and the continuous system are switched when a predetermined condition is established. On the other hand, in the third control example, in the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22, it is controlled to be switched to a selection table in which the probability that the effect is selected is different depending on the number of depressions and the remaining time of the SW effective time. It is different. Only the points different from the second control example will be described, and the description of the same points as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 133-FIG. 134, an example of the display mode in the continuous hit effect using the frame button 22 displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects a fluctuation pattern for executing SW advance notice effects, the SW notice effect set in the fluctuation patterns is set, and the third symbol changes During the display, an effect of notifying the player to execute the frame button 22 continuously as shown in FIG. 133A is executed. In the SW advance notice effect in the third control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed to win a lottery (lottery whether or not to display the effect), a display mode indicating the degree of expectation to the jackpot is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (a) shows a display mode displayed at the start of the SW advance effect. The variation pattern for which the SW advance notice effect is set is selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is pressed when the predetermined timing predetermined during the fluctuation display of the third symbol comes. A display mode (FIG. 133 (a)) for notifying the player of the start is displayed. In the SW announcement effect in the third control example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), the third symbol that is being displayed at high speed is reduced and displayed in the upper right, and the display mode of the SW announcement effect in the other display area Is configured to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the indicator is displayed, and when the frame button 22 is pressed, the indicator (meter) is displayed in a variable manner (the color of the memory of the indicator is changed by pressing). The color of the memory of this indicator is changed sequentially from the right memory in accordance with the pressing of the frame button 22, and the player is informed that the expectation to the jackpot is high when the color is changed to the memory of MAX. (See FIG. 134 (a)).

  In addition, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 is displayed in the display mode of the SW advance effect, and the characters "Consecutively hit!" Are displayed thereon, and it is informed that it is a gaming method in which the frame button 22 is continuously hit. It is done. Further, below the symbol imitating the frame button 22, a remaining amount meter M is displayed which indicates a remaining time (a remaining period of the SW effective period) in which the frame button 22 can be pressed. The remaining amount meter M is configured such that the internal color is changed from right to left according to the decrease of the SW effective time. At the start of the SW advance presentation effect, the inside of the remaining amount meter M is entirely displayed in red, but is sequentially changed from white to the right (red display decreases) and displayed (see FIG. 133 (b)). When the inside is all changed to white, the player is notified that the SW effective time has ended. In addition, at the start of the SW preview effect, the game description of the SW preview effect (a character display of “Meter to MAX!”, And “MAX will be intensely!” Is displayed). Thereafter, although the SW effective time starts, until then, the color of the remaining amount meter M is not changed, and the player can recognize that the SW effective time has not started.

  FIG. 134 (a) is an example of a display mode displayed when a lottery for effect is won by pressing the frame button 22. FIG. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), when the player has won the drawing for effect, the color is changed (variable from white to red) up to the memory of MAX of the indicator, and "super hot !!" Characters are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the SW effective time has passed and even if the remaining time is not enough to win the lottery for the effect, the character “Sorry!” Is displayed, and the jackpot is expected The effect of notifying the degree is not displayed. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed, it is drawn every time whether it is a win for the effect. The lottery probability is set higher in the case where the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern being displayed in a variable display is a win than in the case where the lottery result is a win, and the character of "super heat !!" is displayed, If the jackpot variation pattern is being executed, it can be expected.

  In this control example, the fluctuation pattern for which the SW advance presentation effect is set is limited to a fluctuation pattern serving as a win or a fluctuation pattern for out-of-order super reach. Therefore, the player can always recognize that the game is a reach when the SW advance effect is being executed, and if the character of "super hot !!" can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22, a jackpot and Can be expected to be

  In this control example, although it was constituted so that an expectation of big hit might be displayed during change of the 3rd design, it may constitute so that it may notify not only it but a lottery result directly. Not only the jackpot, but also give a point on the presentation, by that point, give an item on the presentation, or display a two-dimensional bar code etc., by capturing with a mobile phone etc., standby image on the Internet And other benefits may be obtained.

  Next, an electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. The electrical configuration in the third control example is different from the second control example in the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 135 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 in the third control example, a lottery table 222 g is added to the ROM 222 in the second control example. The other configuration is the same as in the second control example, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  A lottery table 222g in the present third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (f). The lottery table 222g includes a first lottery table 222g1, a second lottery table 222g2, a third lottery table 222g3, a fourth lottery table 222g4, a fifth lottery table 222g5, and a sixth lottery table 222g6. The first to third lottery tables 222g1 to 222g are set so that the number of values of the effect counter 223j determined to be won by the effect depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is different. Further, in each lottery table, the number of effect counters 223 j that are determined to be winning is set larger when the lottery result of the changing special symbol (third symbol) is a win.

  In the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, when the remaining time of the SW effective time (set to 10 seconds in this control example) is more than 5 seconds, and the frame button 22 is pressed 10 times or more in 5 seconds or less It is a lottery table selected in the case where it is done. The first lottery table 222g1 is selected when the pressing number of the frame button 22 is 1 to 19 times, and the second lottery table 222g2 is selected when the pressing number of the frame button 22 is 20 times to 39 times The third lottery table 222g3 is a lottery table which is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 40 or more.

  The fourth lottery table 222g to the sixth lottery table 222g6 are lottery tables selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is less than ten when the remaining time of the SW effective time is five seconds or less. The fourth lottery table 222g4 to the sixth lottery table 222g6 have the same lottery probability as the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, but the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is set to half. Therefore, even for a player with a small number of times of pressing of the frame button 22, it is configured so that the effect can be easily set.

  In this control example, the lottery tables having different selection probabilities are switched depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and as shown in FIGS. 137 (a) to (c) The lottery table with different lottery probability may be switched depending on the remaining time of. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be combined with the configuration in which the lottery table is switched according to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the remaining time of the SW effective time. In this case, the larger the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, the higher the lottery probability is set, and when the remaining time decreases, the lottery probability is set higher. As a result, if the player presses the frame button 22, the possibility of winning an effect can be further increased by continuously pressing the frame button 22 during the SW effective period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The RAM 223 in the third control example is the same as the first control example described above except that an interval counter 223t, an indicator level 223u, an adapted flag 223v, and a switching flag 223w are added, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The interval counter 223t is periodically (every 4 ms) executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 during the execution of the SW effect (see FIG. 133) described above. In the button input monitoring and rendering process 3 (see FIG. 138), one is added when the frame button 22 is not pressed. The interval counter 223t is referred to in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3, and when it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223t is the upper limit (corresponding to 750 in this control example, that is, 3 seconds), the indicator level 223 u is decremented by one. As a result, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) during execution of the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133), the indicator level display is reduced by one. The effect of displaying this indicator level indicates that the expectation level of a jackpot is high by increasing the indicator level to the maximum value. Therefore, the player can be urged to press the frame button 22 continuously so that the indicator level does not decrease, and the player's motivation to press the frame button 22 can be improved.

  The indicator level 223 u is for storing the amount of the indicator to be displayed in the SW effect (see FIG. 133) described above. Specifically, the indicator displayed in the SW effect is divided into eight areas in the left-right direction, and is turned on sequentially from the left area. In this control example, it is determined how much the above eight areas are to be lighted based on the value of the indicator level 223u. For example. If the value of the indicator level 223 u is “1”, only the leftmost area is lit, if “4” the area from the left to the fourth is lit, and if “8”, all The area is lit.

  The indicator level 223 u is set in frame button input monitoring / description processing 3 (FIG. 138), SW presentation selection processing 2 (FIG. 140) or SW presentation selection processing 3 (FIG. 141) described later.

  The adapted flag 223v is a flag used to determine whether or not the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect has been switched in the SW effect (see FIG. 133) described above. The adaptation completed flag 223v is executed when the SW effective period of the SW effect described above becomes 5 seconds or less. In the SW depression adaptation processing (FIG. 139), the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is a predetermined number of times (main control In the example, if it is less than 10 times, it is set to on. In this case, a switching flag 223w described later is set to ON, and the table for selecting the SW effect is switched. When the adapted flag 223v is turned on, it can be determined that the switching of the table for selecting this SW effect has been performed.

  The switching flag 223w is a flag used to determine whether or not to switch the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect in the SW effect described above (see FIG. 133). The switching flag 223w is executed when the SW effective period of the SW effect described above becomes 5 seconds or less. In the SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139), the number of pressing times of the frame button 22 is a predetermined number of times (this control example Then, if it is less than 10 times), it is set to on. When the switching flag 223w is turned on, the process of selecting the SW effect is from the SW effect selecting process 2 using the first to third lottery tables to the SW effect selecting process 3 utilizing the fourth to sixth lottery tables. And it will switch. As a result, even for a player with a small number of depressions in the SW effect, it is possible to display an effect with a high degree of expectation of becoming a big hit, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141. FIG. The control process of the main controller 110 is the same as that of the second control example, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1360). In the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 3 (S1360), the same processing as the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (S1350) in the second control example is executed in S6001 to S6004. After the process of S6004 is executed, it is determined whether the remaining period of the SW effective period is 5 seconds or less (S6050). Note that this SW effective period is set to the SW scenario, and is subtracted by updating the SW scenario. If it is determined that the remaining period of the SW effective period is 5 seconds or less (S6050: Yes), SW depression adaptation processing is executed (S6051). Details of the SW depression adaptation process (S6051) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6050 that the remaining period of the SW effective period is longer than 5 seconds (S6050: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052). If it is determined in the process of S6052 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052: Yes), the interval counter 223t is reset (S6053), the SW effect selection process 2 is executed (S7008), and this process is executed. finish. The details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the process of S6052 (S6052: No), the interval counter 223t is incremented by 1 (S6055), and it is determined whether the interval counter 223t is the upper limit (S6052). S6056). If it is determined in the process of S6056 that the interval counter is the upper limit value, the indicator level 223u is decremented by 1 (S6057), and a display command indicating the updated indicator level 223u is set (S6058). This process is ended by resetting 223t (S6059).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6056 that the interval counter is not the upper limit value, the processes of S6057 to S6059 are skipped, and the present process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 139, the details of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 3 (S1360) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW depression adaptation process (S6051) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring and effect process 3 (S1360).

  In the SW depression adaptation process (S6051), first, it is determined whether the adaptation completed flag 223v is on. In this adapted flag 223v, processing (S7002 to S7004) is executed to determine the pressed state of the player by the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the first half of the SW effective period (remaining period is 10 seconds to 5 seconds). It is a flag which shows whether it is done or not. If it is determined that the adaptation completed flag 223v is off (S7001: No), the adaptation completed flag 223v is set to on (S7002). It is determined whether the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003: No), the processing of S7005 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223s is 10 or more (S7003: Yes), the switching flag 223w is set to ON (S7004). Thereafter, the processing of S7005 is executed. The switching flag 223w is a flag indicating that the lottery table is set to be switched even if the number of pressing times is small, since the number of times the player presses the first half of the frame button 22 is small.

  In S7005, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7005). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S7005: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S7005: Yes), it is determined whether the switching flag 223w is on (S7006). If it is determined that the switching flag 223w is off (S7006: No), the SW rendering selection process 2 is executed (S7008), and this process is ended. The details of the SW effect selection processing 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7006 that the switching flag 223w is on (S7006: Yes), the SW rendering selection process 3 is executed (S7007), and this process is ended. The details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 140, the details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008). As described above, the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) is a process executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 138) and the SW depression adaptation process (S6051).

  In the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008), first, the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is updated by adding 1 to it (S7101). It is determined whether the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102). If it is determined that the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW depression counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103), the process of S7108 is executed without switching the lottery table. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7103 that the value of the SW depression counter 223s is 20 or more (S7103: Yes), the second lottery table 222g2 is switched and set (S7104). Thereafter, the processing of S7108 is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S7102 that the first lottery table 222g1 is not set (S7102: No), it is determined whether the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105). If it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7105 that the second lottery table 222g2 is not set (S7105: No), the process proceeds to S7108.

  If it is determined in the process of S7106 that the value of the SW depression counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106: Yes), the third lottery table 223g3 is switched and set (S7107), and the process proceeds to S7108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the SW depression counter 223s is 40 or more (S7106: No), the process of S7107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7108.

  In the process of S7108, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of whether the variable display is in progress is a win (S7108). If it is determined in the process of S7108 that the determination result is a hit (S7108: Yes), the indicator level is set to 8 (S7109), and a display command indicating the set indicator level is set (S7110) The notification sound and the lamp data are set (S7111), the SW effective time is reset (S7112), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7108 that the determination result is not a hit (S7108: No), it is determined whether the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113). If it is determined in the process of S7113 that the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113: Yes), the indicator level 223u is incremented by 1 (S7114), and a display command indicating the added indicator level 223u is set. (S7115), this processing ends.

  Here, the display command indicating the indicator level 223u set in S7110 and S7115 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. In the process (S1302), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display command, the display effect control is performed in accordance with the indicator level 223 u of the command received by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 133).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7113 that the indicator level 223u is larger than 6 (S7113: No), the processes of S7114 and S7115 are skipped, and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the details of the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing SW effect selection processing 3 (S7007). The SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) is a process executed to select a SW effect when the switching flag 223w is on in the above-described SW depression adaptation process (FIG. 139).

  In this SW effect selection process 3 (S7007), instead of the above-described SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) and the first lottery table, the fourth lottery table is replaced with the second lottery table, and the fifth lottery table is The third drawing table is different from the third drawing table in that the sixth drawing table is used, and the other points are the same.

  As described above, in the present control example, in the continuous hitting effect in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed, the process of changing the probability of determining that the effect is to be displayed by the number of continuous hits is performed by switching the table. Therefore, since the selection probability can be changed by a simple process, the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the case has been described where a predetermined effect is displayed by continuous hitting with the notice effect performed during the variation time of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and in the case of the third symbol, a big hit Whether a definite change is awarded by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 during a big hit game or a normal game, etc. (in a positive change game state) You may comprise so that it may be used by the production | presentation made to notify a player by lottery. Also in such a case, set a period in which the frame button 22 can be continuously hit, and change the lottery table whether to notify the effect by the number of consecutive hits in that period, the remaining time of the effective time, etc. By configuring, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the timing at which an effect is notified can be made random. In addition, for a player who has a small number of consecutive strokes of the frame button 22 or a slow consecutive stroke speed, effects can be produced according to the player by switching and setting a table with a high selection probability.

<On the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 142 to FIG. 146, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the configuration has been described in which the gaming balls are periodically guided to the second specified winning opening 650b in the case where the gaming balls are guided to the entrance 651a of the specified winning device 650. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, in the configuration where the gaming balls are randomly guided to the entrance 651a of the specified winning device 650, it is easy to enter the second specified winning opening 650b and the second specified winning opening 650b. The configuration set for the case of control to make it difficult to enter the ball will be described. Only the points different from the first control example will be described, and the description of the same points as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 142 shows the opening pattern of the entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 and the entry of the guided game ball when the gaming ball is guided to the entrance 651 a of the specific winning device 650 in the fourth control example. It is the timing chart which showed the pattern of non-entering ball, respectively. FIG. 142 (a) is a timing chart showing a method of entering a ball from one round to two rounds when jackpot C (16 rounds jackpot) is selected. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the jackpot C, the opening operation for one second of the ball entry restriction plate 654 is performed in the first round, and the opening operation for 1.6 seconds is performed in the second round. Thereafter, after an interval of 10 seconds (closing operation of the ball entry restriction plate 654), the third round is performed. After the third round, until 30 seconds of open or 10 balls of game balls are detected by the first ball entry sensor 652a or the second ball entry sensor 652b (in the first specified winning hole 650a or the second specified winning hole 650b 10 balls will be executed).

  The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to enter 10 balls into the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650. In that case, after 10 balls are entered into the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, means may be provided for restricting entry into the entrance portion of the specific winning device 650.

  The interval time between the first round and the second round (the closing time of the ball entry restriction plate 654) is constituted by one second. The game ball which has flowed down to the first specified winning opening 650 a during that time can not enter the first specified winning opening 650 a and flows down to the bypass flow path 653. Since the detouring time to flow down the detouring path 653 and reach the second specified winning opening 650b is 1.6 seconds, even the game ball reached immediately at the closing after one round When the second specified winning opening 650b is reached during the closing time, the ball entry restricting plate 654 is open time. Therefore, the game ball which went to the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 650b can enter the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 650b. In addition, since the opening period of the second round is set to 1.6 seconds, it is the gaming ball which has reached the first specified winning opening 650 a just before the start of the second round and flowed down to the bypass channel 653. Even in this case, the player can enter the second specified winning hole 650b. Therefore, the gaming balls guided to the first specified winning opening 650a during the interval period (during the closing time) are all configured to be able to enter the second specified winning opening 650b in the second round.

  FIG. 142 (b) is a timing chart showing a state of entering the second specified winning opening 650b in the case of a small hit (2 rounds) in the fourth control example. The small hit is made up of two rounds of games. The opening period of the first round and the second round is set to one second, and the interval period between the first round and the second round is set to 0.6 second. Thus, the first round and the second round of the jackpot C and the first and second rounds of the small jack have only a slight difference between the open period and the interval period, and this difference is very short. Because of the difference, it is difficult for the player to determine the difference. Therefore, even in the third symbol display device 81, it is difficult to distinguish the difference between the small hit and the big hit C, so the player can hit the big hit that is the small hit when the start of the hit game is started. It is difficult to determine if it is.

  Since the interval period of the small hit is 0.6 seconds and the opening period of the second round is 1 second, the added time is 1.6 seconds, and the detouring period is also 1.6 seconds. Since it is configured, the bypassed gaming ball can not enter the second specified winning opening 650b in the second round. Therefore, in the second round of the small hitting game, it is difficult to enter the second specified winning opening 650b, although the first specified winning opening 650a may be entered.

  In the fourth control example, the effect of whether or not the hit game is a big hit C in the interval period (10 seconds) after the 2 rounds of the big hit C and the small hit is a line using the third symbol display device 81 It will be. In this effect, an effect that is more advantageous to the player is displayed as the number of game balls entering the second specified winning opening 650b increases between one round and two rounds. Specifically, the enemy is displayed, and if the main character fights over the enemy and wins, it is notified that the jackpot is C. In this case, the number of life gauges of the main character is set to a large number depending on the number entered in the second specified winning opening 650b. Therefore, even if it receives attack from an enemy, it is difficult to lose. As described above, in the present control example, the player is provided with the right to know early whether the game is a jackpot during the first or second round game, so a large amount of game balls can be obtained. Even during the period of the opening pattern which can not be obtained, the player can play the game by firing the game ball.

  Next, control processing in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, referring to FIG. 143, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process in the fourth control example determines whether or not the lottery result is a small hit with respect to the first control example described above (S250), and the lottery result is a small hit (S250: Yes), it is different only in the point of setting the start of the small hit (S251), and is otherwise the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, a jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. In this jackpot control process 2 (S1050), the control of jackpot only in the first control example is also added to the control of jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the process of S1150 and S1151 is the start of the jackpot or the small hit, and the process of S1151 is configured to determine whether the jackpot is medium or small. The other parts are the same, and the same parts are given the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the jackpot command processing (S1412) in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing 2 (S1420). In the jackpot command process 2 (S1420), the process of S1810 is changed to the inter-round process (S1850) with respect to the jackpot command process (S1420) in the first control example. The details of the inter-round process (S1850) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of this inter-round process (S1850). In the inter-round process (S1859), first, the in-round flag 223m is set to OFF (S8001). Thereafter, it is determined whether it is a small hit or a big hit C (S8002). If it is determined that it is a small hit or a big hit C (S8002: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the second round (S8003). When it was determined that it was the end timing of the second round, it showed the type of jackpot being executed (whether it is a jackpot C or a small hit or not) and the number of balls entered into the second specified winning opening 650b A display command is set (S8004). The display command set in S8004 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives this display command, the life gauge corresponds to whether the main character wins or the enemy wins based on the jackpot type, and also corresponds to the number of ball entering the second specified winning opening 650b. Display settings are performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8002, when it is determined that it is not small hitting or big hitting C (S8002: No), when it is determined in the process of S800 that it is not the end timing of the second round (S8003: No), this process is finish.

  In the fourth control example, the game ball between rounds is configured not to enter the second specified winning hole 650b in the small hit, but it is not limited to that, two rounds to be able to win about 1 ball The eye open period may be set to 1.2 seconds or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the expectation of being a big hit C even if it is a small hit more sustained.

  Also, in the bypass flow path 654 described above, for example, a material having a high coefficient of friction is used on the road surface portion or unevenness is provided so that the coefficient of friction of the road surface becomes high so that the flow-down speed of the gaming ball decreases. May be As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass through the bypass flow passage 654 increases, so that the game ball stays in the bypass flow passage 654 during the interval time even when the interval time becomes long. Therefore, after that, the interval time ends, and it is possible to enter the second specified winning opening 650b.

  Furthermore, the bypass channel described above may be configured to have a variable transit time. For example, a plurality of bypass channels having different transit times may be provided, and gaming balls may be distributed to those bypass channels, or a movable wall section movable in the bypass channel is provided, and the movable wall section is movable By doing this, the time to pass the bypass channel may be changed. In addition, a mechanism that makes the passing time of the game ball random, for example, a chrone, may be provided in the bypass channel. As a result, since it is possible to give variation to the passage time of the bypass channel, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In addition, the number of specified winning openings provided in the above-described specified winning device 650 is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Furthermore, the specific winning opening provided in the specific winning device 650 is not limited to the specific winning opening, but may be a starting winning opening for starting the start of a special symbol, or a predetermined winning ball based on entering the ball. It may be a general winning opening that is paid, or a combination of them.

  Further, in the first to fourth control examples described above, the lottery for the same special symbol is performed based on the entry of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, but the first winning Based on entry to the second opening 64 and the second opening 64, for example, based on the entry to the first opening 64 lottery of the first special symbol, based on the entry to the second opening 640 You may comprise so that the lottery of the 2nd special symbol may be performed. As a result, since the variation of the game can be increased, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the first to fourth control examples described above, various effects are executed by the voice lamp control device 113 that has received a command from the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed by the main controller 110. As a result, since it is not necessary to send and receive commands, it is possible to provide an inexpensive gaming machine which can reduce the design cost.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<An example of the technical idea in which the drive gear 473 and the notch 422d overlap>
A first gear member and a second gear member supported by the base member and having gear teeth engraved on their side surfaces and meshed with each other, at least the first gear member is formed of a rotary gear, and the second gear member The present invention further includes a plate-like portion that is provided on a side surface of the gear teeth, and the plate-like portion is the gear teeth of the first gear member when viewed in the rotational axis direction of the first gear member. The gaming machine is formed so as to be able to overlap with the gear teeth meshing with a gear member, and the plate-like portion is swept from the tooth tip side of the gear teeth of the second gear member to the tooth bottom side At least the first gear member and the plate-like portion rotate the first gear member by providing the formed notch and arranging the notch and the first gear member at a predetermined position. It is possible to form a specific phase position that is viewed at intervals in axial direction. Gaming machine A1, characterized in that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plate-like portion is formed on the side surface of the gear teeth of one gear member of the pair of gear members engaged with each other. There is a gaming machine which prevents axial movement of the other gear member, which is the opposite gear member of one gear member (see, for example, JP-A-2012-217702). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the other gear member is removed, it is necessary to remove one gear member in advance. Therefore, there is a problem that the maintainability is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the plate-like portion and the first gear member are formed in the rotational axis direction of the first gear member at least at the specific phase position by forming the notch portion in the plate-like portion. Visually spaced apart. Therefore, at the specific phase position, the first gear member can be pulled out through the notch portion of the plate-like portion, so that the first gear member can be replaced without removing the second gear member in advance. Therefore, the maintainability of the pair of gear members engaged with each other can be improved.

  In addition, since the first gear member is formed by a rotary gear, the second gear member in which the plate-like portion is formed may be a rotary gear or a rack gear.

  In the gaming machine A1, on the tooth tip side of the second gear member, the formed width of the second gear member along the direction in which the gear teeth are arranged is the tooth tip of the second gear member. The distance between the outer circumference of the second gear member and the distance between the outer circumference of the first gear member and the outer circumference of the first gear member is equal to or slightly larger than the distance between the second gear member and the gear teeth. A game machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, it is possible to minimize the period in which the first gear member overlaps the notch in the rotational axis direction of the first gear member. Thus, the plate-like portion can secure the action of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotational axis direction.

  In addition, the shape of a notch part is not specifically limited, An arc shape may be sufficient and rectangular shape may be sufficient.

  Also, the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, in the case where the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the sizes of the gear teeth (in particular, gear teeth) are formed differently for each of the divided portions, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear The notch is formed by the distance between the points where the externals of the member's tooth tips intersect and the notch crosses, as compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the tip circle of the large gear teeth. It can suppress that a part becomes large. Therefore, the plate-like portion can secure the action of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotational axis direction. In addition, in the divided part mentioned above, there may be a part in which a gear tooth is not formed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the cutaway portion is a circle formed coaxially with the first gear member, and the circle formed to have a diameter slightly larger than a tip circle of the first gear member, (1) A game machine A3 formed in an overlapping shape when projected onto the plate-like portion from the direction of the rotational axis of the gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notched portion is formed to have a diameter slightly larger than the tip circle of the first gear member and a circle coaxial with the first gear member It is formed in the shape which overlaps when it projects to a plate-like part from the rotation shaft direction of 1 gear member. Therefore, while suppressing the size of a notch to the minimum, the formation area of a plate-like part can be secured at the maximum, and the rigidity of a plate-like part can be improved.

  The size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, in the case where the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the sizes of the gear teeth (in particular, gear teeth) are formed differently for each of the divided portions, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear The notch is formed by the distance between the points where the externals of the member's tooth tips intersect and the notch crosses, as compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the tip circle of the large gear teeth. It can suppress that a part becomes large. Therefore, the formation area of the plate-like portion can be secured to the maximum, and the rigidity of the plate-like portion can be improved. In addition, in the divided part mentioned above, there may be a part in which a gear tooth is not formed.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gear teeth inscribed in the first gear member and the gear teeth inscribed in the second gear member are in a proper meshing state in which the relationship of meshing gear teeth is fixed. Forming the first gear member along the notch formed in the second gear member and meshing with the second gear member. Game machine A4 characterized by being formed by

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the first gear member is moved along the outer shape of the notch portion of the plate portion of the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member When the gear members are engaged, the gear teeth are engaged in a proper engagement state.

  Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are engaged in a proper engagement state, alignment at the time of engagement of the first gear member and the second gear member is performed at the notch portion of the plate portion. It can be carried out. As a result, the meshing adjustment between the first gear member and the second gear member can be facilitated, so that the maintainability of gear replacement can be improved.

  In the case where the relationship between the teeth in which the first gear member and the second gear member mesh with each other is fixed, the rotating gear member to be meshed is an incomplete gear in which the teeth are formed on a part of the side surface. In some cases, the case where the moving rack member that reciprocates with respect to the rotating gear member is meshed is exemplified.

  At the time of gear change, for example, it becomes a problem whether each tooth of the first gear member is meshed with which tooth of the second gear member. In this case, the gear is properly meshed in the relationship of mutually meshing teeth. In order to cause the gear teeth to mesh, it is only necessary to be able to suppress that at least one of the mutually meshing gear teeth shifts.

  In the game machines A1 to A4, a movement resistance of at least one gear member of the first gear member or the second gear member is increased at least at the specific phase position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the movement resistance of at least one gear member of the first gear member or the second gear member increases at least at the specific phase position. Therefore, the maintenance worker can facilitate, for example, the operation of engaging a pair of gear members (engaging the gear members at a proper meshing position) by relying on the increase in movement resistance.

  That is, in a state in which the first gear member and the second gear member stop in the middle of movement, when the notch portion of the plate-like portion does not coincide with the first gear member, the first gear member is removed. Even if it is rubbed, the plate-like part becomes an obstacle and can not be removed. Therefore, it is necessary to move the second gear member. In this case, by moving the second gear member to a position where the resistance increases, the notch portion of the plate-like portion can be formed at a position coinciding with the first gear member, and the first gear member can be removed. Becomes easy.

  In addition, as a case where movement resistance increases, for example, a friction member which rubs with at least one of the first gear member or the second gear member at a specific phase position, or the first gear member or at a specific phase position is provided. A case where at least one of the second gear members reaches the movement end is exemplified.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first gear member and the second gear member are respectively formed to be moved to the movement end, and the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the movement end of each. In this case, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the plate-like portion and the first gear member at least partially overlap with each other as viewed in the rotational axis direction of the first gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the first gear member and the second gear member are disposed at the movement end, the rotational axis direction of the first gear member is viewed. At least a part of the plate-like portion and the first gear member overlap. That is, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch matches the first gear member) is formed at a position different from the movement end of the first gear member and the second gear member. Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are moved and the first gear member comes to a specific phase position, the first gear member has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (vertically perpendicular direction). . Therefore, the wobble of the first gear member that tends to occur at the specific phase position can be alleviated by the momentum of the first gear member in the rotational direction.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A6, a drive motor for generating a driving force is provided, and the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in a detachable manner, and a layer between the drive motor and the first gear member A game machine A7 characterized in that the plate-like portion is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in a removable mode.

  Here, even if it is attempted to mesh the first gear member with the second gear member from the side on which the plate-like portion is formed, the first gear member abuts against the plate-like portion and movement is prevented. The gear member and the second gear member can not be engaged with each other. Therefore, when the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor, there is a possibility that the disposition position of the drive motor may be limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, since the first gear member can pass through the notch portion of the plate portion, the arrangement position of the drive motor is not limited by the relationship with the plate portion, The degree of freedom in arranging the motor can be improved.

  Further, since the plate-like portion of the second gear member is formed in the layer between the drive motor and the first gear member, when replacing the drive motor, do the drive motor and the first gear member be removed together? You can choose to remove the drive motor only.

  That is, the drive motor and the first gear member can be easily separated by pulling out the drive motor while keeping the first gear member in contact with the plate portion. By thus replacing the drive motor, it is possible to replace the drive motor while maintaining the meshing state of the first gear member and the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member may be replaced again. It is possible to eliminate the need for meshing adjustment. This can improve maintainability.

  In the case where the first gear member is pivotally supported in a retractable manner from the drive motor, the first gear member may be externally fitted and fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, or at the tip of the drive shaft of the drive motor. The case where a plurality of pins are protruded from the arranged adapter and the plurality of pins are inserted into the first gear member is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first gear member is a shaft having one end fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor and the other end being an end opposite to the one end of the shaft. The shaft portion and the rotating body portion are formed so as to be separable from each other, and the shaft portion is axially protruded from an end face of the other end portion. A plurality of projecting pins are provided, and the rotating body portion is provided with a plurality of fitting portions to which the plurality of projecting pins are respectively fitted, and a connection between the shaft portion and the rotating body portion is the plurality of A game machine A8 characterized in that a projecting pin is formed by being fitted into the plurality of fitting portions.

  Here, in order to bring the first gear member into contact with the plate-like portion and pull it out directly from the drive shaft of the drive motor, a force greater than the static friction generated between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member is required. The force more than the static friction is applied to the second gear member through the plate-like portion that is in contact with the first gear member. Since the static friction is set large to maintain the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member, the plate-like portion may be deformed or the drive motor may be subjected to excessive stress. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, a plurality of projecting pins are provided at the end of the shaft portion fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor and A plurality of fitting portions in which the installation pins are fitted are formed. That is, by the shaft portion and the rotating body portion being engaged at a plurality of points, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member can be maintained without increasing the static friction.

  Therefore, the force required to separate the drive motor and the rotating body portion of the first gear member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the plate-like portion of the second gear member from being deformed or the excessive stress being applied to the drive motor.

  In addition, as a fitting part, the hollow formed in a through-hole and a bottomed cylindrical shape is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the driving motor is disposed in proximity to the drive motor, and extends in the direction opposite to the extending direction of the drive shaft of the drive motor along the side surface of the motor case of the drive motor. A game machine A9 characterized by comprising a regulation unit.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7 or A8, when pulling out the drive motor from the first gear member, the drive motor is pressed against the restriction portion extended along the side surface of the drive motor. It can be pulled out. Thus, the axis of the drive motor can be prevented from being inclined with respect to the first gear member, and deformation of the first gear member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A9, the restricting portion is formed in a pair with the motor case of the drive motor interposed therebetween, and the extended end of one of the pair of restricting portions is the motor case of the drive motor. A game machine A10, characterized in that it is formed closer to the drive shaft than an end surface opposite to the end surface on which the drive shaft is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the extending end of one of the pair of regulating portions is formed closer to the drive shaft than the end face of the motor case of the drive motor Therefore, the extended end of one of the restriction portions can be effectively used as a fulcrum for pulling out the drive motor. That is, since the extending end of the restricting portion and the side surface of the drive motor are arranged adjacent to each other, the extending end of the restricting portion serves as a fulcrum and the side surface of the drive motor acts as a fulcrum. The distance to the point of action can be minimized. Thereby, the force required for extraction can be suppressed.

  When the drive motor is pulled out with the extended end of one of the restriction portions as a fulcrum, the drive motor can be pulled while pressing the drive motor against the restriction portion on the opposite side of the one restriction portion. Thus, the degree of inclination of the drive motor with respect to the other gear can be suppressed when the drive motor is pulled out.

  In the gaming machine A10, of the pair of restricting portions, the other restricting portion which is the restricting portion on the opposite side of the one restricting portion protrudes equivalent to the extended end of the one restricting portion, or A game machine A11 characterized in that it is formed to project to the opposite side of the drive shaft of the drive motor from the extension end of the one restriction portion.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A11, the other restricting portion to which the drive motor is pressed when the drive motor is pulled out is the drive shaft of the drive motor than the extended end of at least one of the restricting portions. It overhangs to the opposite side and is formed. Therefore, when pulling out the drive motor with the extending end of one of the restriction portions as a fulcrum, the action point is closest to the other restriction portion (that is, the action point is a plane perpendicular to the drive shaft of the drive motor) In the state of being disposed on a plane including the extended end of one of the restriction portions, the movement of the drive motor can be prevented by the other restriction portion.

  Thus, when the drive motor is pulled out, it is possible to reliably prevent the drive motor from moving in a direction away from one of the regulating portions.

  In the gaming machines A7 to A11, a moving contact member is provided opposite to the second gear member across the first gear member, and the moving contact member is a member of the first gear member at the specific phase position. The plate-like portion of the second gear member is disposed spaced apart from the first gear member in the axial direction view, and the plate-like portion of the second gear member overlaps the first gear member in the axial direction view of the first gear member In at least one of the states, the game machine A12 is characterized in that the first gear member and the moving contact member overlap in the axial direction of the first gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A7 to A11, the first gear member simultaneously operates on the plate-like portion of the second gear member and the moving contact member disposed opposite to the second gear member. It is abutted. Thus, the inclination of the first gear member when the first gear member is pulled out of the drive motor can be suppressed.

<An example of a technical idea in which the starting gear teeth 452b1 for meshing are formed in a large size>
A main driving gear member formed as a rotary gear and a driven gear member which starts meshing in the middle of the rotation of the main driving gear member, at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is engaged when meshing starts A game comprising a meshing tooth to be brought into contact and an intermediate tooth meshing with the meshed tooth when meshing is continued, and the meshing tooth is formed larger than the intermediate tooth. Machine B1.

  Here, there is a gaming machine in which the engagement of the main gear member and the driven gear member (the side to which the rotation of the main gear member is transmitted) is started during the rotation of the main gear member (the side rotated by the drive motor). (See, for example, JP 2013-244210 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the teeth meshing at the start of meshing between the main operating gear member and the driven gear member are susceptible to collision at the start of meshing and are easily damaged. On the other hand, if the gear teeth are enlarged, damage to the gear teeth can be prevented, but the backlash becomes large and it becomes difficult to smoothly rotate the driven gear member. Therefore, it has been difficult to achieve both durability and rotational smoothness.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the meshing teeth are formed larger than the intermediate teeth, at least one of the main operating gear member and the driven gear member is durable in meshing teeth meshing at the start of meshing. It is possible to improve and prevent breakage of the meshing teeth. Further, since the backlash between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can be reduced at the intermediate teeth, the rotation of the driven gear member can be made smooth during continuous engagement of the intermediate teeth after the engagement teeth mesh. can do. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously improve the durability of the meshing teeth and the smoothness of the rotation of the driven gear member.

  The start of meshing means a state in which meshing teeth formed on at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start to abut on the other gear member on the opposite side of the one gear member.

  Further, forming the meshing teeth large means that at least one of the tooth width, the tooth thickness or the tooth height is formed larger than the intermediate teeth.

  A game machine B2 comprising a holding mechanism for holding the attitude of the driven gear member in the game machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the holding mechanism for holding the attitude of the driven gear member is provided, so that the attitude of the driven gear member in a state not engaged with the main gear member is stabilized. Can.

  In addition, as a holding mechanism, a mechanism which pinches and holds a driven gear member in an axial direction, a mechanism which holds by mechanical position alignment, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B2, the driven gear member is provided with a notch which is cut away in a direction to retract from the main gear member, and the notch is in contact with the outer periphery of the main gear member at at least two points. A game machine B3 characterized in that the holding mechanism is formed.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine B2, the holding mechanism for holding the driven gear member can be formed by the abutment of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member at two points. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a separate member for holding the attitude of the driven gear member.

  The notch may be any shape that does not interfere with the tip circle of the main driving gear member, and the shape is not limited. However, at least the radius of curvature of the notch is the tip circle of the main driving gear member It is formed below the radius.

  A gaming machine B4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B3, the cutaway portion is formed as an arc-shaped concave portion circumscribing the main movement gear member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the effect of holding the attitude of the driven gear member is improved by the notches of the driven gear member being in contact with the outer periphery of the main driving gear member. It can be done.

  That is, the notch portion of the driven gear member abuts on the outer periphery of the main gear member, thereby suppressing the concentration of the friction force at the time of contact to one place, and the friction force on the entire notch portion Can be dispersed. Thereby, the location which hold | maintains a driven gear member by a driving gear member can be increased, and the effect which maintains the attitude | position of a driven gear member can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect by which a notch part is circumscribed to a main action gear member is not specifically limited. That is, for example, it may be in an aspect in which it is circumscribed to the tip circle of the main driving gear member, or it may be in an aspect in which a surface on which the gear teeth are omitted is formed in the main driving gear member.

  In the gaming machine B4, the main moving gear member and the cut-out portion of the driven gear member are drawn at the contact point between the central axis of the main moving gear member and the bottom of the driven gear member. A game machine B5 characterized in that it is formed on at least both sides of a perpendicular.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the contact point between the main driving gear member and the notch portion of the following gear member is a surface in which the tooth bottom of the following gear member is connected from the central axis of the main driving gear member. Since it is formed on at least both sides of the drawn vertical line, it is possible to prevent the rotation (movement) of the driven gear member in both directions when the notch is in contact with the main driving gear member.

  The driven gear member may be, for example, a rotating gear member formed as a rotating gear, or a rack gear formed as a parallel moving gear.

  In any one of the game machines B2 to B5, the driven gear member includes an engagement protrusion receiving portion formed larger than the meshing teeth, and the notch portion is formed in the engagement protrusion receiving portion. The engagement between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is started after the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member abut on the engagement protrusion receiving portion. .

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the engagement projecting reception portion is used as a substitute for the teeth to be abutted against the main driving gear member, thereby making the durability of the driven gear member It is possible to improve the quality.

  The engagement protrusion receiving portion in which the notch portion is formed is not originally a portion of the role of meshing with the gear teeth of the main driving gear member, but is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member. It is part of the role to maintain. Therefore, the size is not limited in accordance with the size of the gear teeth to be engaged, as in the case of the gear teeth. Therefore, the durability of the driven gear member is improved by using the engagement projecting receiving portion, which is formed more robustly than the gear teeth, at a portion to be abutted at the start of the engagement of the main gear member and the driven gear member. It can be done.

  In the gaming machine B6, the main movement gear member includes a recess portion which is a recess formed adjacent to the meshing teeth, and the meshing teeth of the main movement gear member are in contact with the engagement protrusion receiving portion A game machine B7 characterized in that the driven gear member is rotated in such a manner that the engagement protrusion receiving portion enters the recess portion before.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the driven gear member is rotated before the meshing teeth of the driving gear member abut on the engagement projecting receiving portion of the driven gear member. It is possible to suppress the impact at the time of the start of the engagement between the gear and the driven gear member.

  Here, when the driven gear member abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member at two points, the posture of the driven gear member is maintained even if the main driving gear member rotates. On the other hand, when the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member are in proximity to the engagement projection receiving portion of the driven gear member, the recess formed adjacent to the meshing teeth faces the engagement projection reception portion. Since the recess is not in contact with the engagement protrusion, the effect of maintaining the attitude of the driven gear member is released. Then, the driven gear member is slightly rotated by the frictional force generated between the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member and the engagement protrusion receiving portion, and the engagement protrusion receiving portion enters the recess. Thereby, the driven gear member starts to rotate before the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member abut on the engagement protrusion receiving portion of the driven gear member, so that the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing The impact at the time of doing can be suppressed.

<An example of a technical idea in which the protruding gear member 7452e moves in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452>
A driving source for generating a driving force, a main operating gear member rotated by the driving power of the driving source, a first moving member moving in conjunction with the rotation of the main driving gear member, and rotation of the main driving gear member The driven gear member moved in conjunction with the main driving gear member in the middle, the second moving member moved in conjunction with the movement of the driven gear member, the main moving gear member and the driven gear member An adjustment device for starting the movement of the first moving member in a movement range from the movement base end to the movement end, and the movement of the driven gear member is started by the adjustment device in conjunction with the main movement gear member A game machine C1 characterized in that a plurality of positions of the first moving member at the time can be formed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a first moving member and a second moving member which are moved by the driving force of a single drive source (see, for example, JP2009-125092A). ). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the aspect of the second moving member at a specific position on the way of movement of the first moving member is limited to one, there is a problem that the variation of the effect is small.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the adjustment device can form a plurality of positions of the first moving member when the driven gear member starts moving in conjunction with the main driving gear member, the second moving gear is interlocked with the driven gear member A plurality of positions of the first moving member can be formed when the moving member starts moving. Therefore, multiple variations of the effects of the first moving member and the second moving member can be formed.

  In the case where the driven gear member starts moving in conjunction with the driving gear member, the driven gear member is moved by meshing the driving gear member and the driven gear member, or the driving gear member and the driven gear member The aspect in which the driven gear member is moved by the friction generated between the gear member and the main gear member and the main gear member are formed of a magnetic material, and the magnetic force generated between the main gear member and the driven gear member The aspect etc. in which a driven gear member is moved are illustrated.

  Further, as an aspect of forming the adjusting device, an aspect in which at least one gear tooth of the main driving gear member or the following gear member can be extended in a direction away from the rotation axis, or between the axes of the main driving gear member and the following gear member The aspect etc. which are formed so that a distance can be changed are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1, the interlocking movement between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is by meshing, and the adjusting device is disposed on the main driving gear member and moves in the radial direction of the main driving gear member. And a projecting state in which the driven gear member projects from the rotational direction of the main driving gear member to a position allowing contact with the driven gear member, and the rotating member abuts from the rotational direction to the driven gear member And the projecting member is in contact with the driven gear member when the main driving gear member is rotated while the projecting member is in the projecting state. A game machine C2 characterized in that the engagement of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is started.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, if the method of interlocking the main gear member and the driven gear member is different depending on whether the projecting member of the adjusting device is in the extended state or in the retracted state. You can

  Here, the start and release of the engagement between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can also be performed by changing the inter-axial distance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. However, in this case, in order to suppress the meshing resistance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member, it is necessary to move the rotation axis in the direction perpendicular to the axis while maintaining the parallelism of the rotation axis. Required Therefore, the mechanism for moving the main driving gear member and the driven gear member may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C2, the main driving gear member is provided with a protruding member formed to be movable in the radial direction, and the main driving gear member and the driven gear are provided when the protruding member is protruding (when forming a protruding state). The engagement with the member is started. Therefore, it is unnecessary to move the rotation axis of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member, and therefore the parallelism of the rotation axis is maintained. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the projecting member does not require accuracy, and the mechanism for moving the projecting member can be simplified.

  As a method of forming the projecting member in the projecting state, there is a method of projecting the projecting member by a centrifugal force generated when the main driving gear member is rotated, or a solenoid is disposed inside the projecting member and the solenoid is driven. The method etc. which make a protrusion member project are illustrated. Further, one or more projecting members may be provided.

  In the gaming machine C2, the projecting member is configured to be in the retracted state at least in a stationary state of the main gear member by receiving an urging force generated toward the rotation shaft side of the main gear member, and the main gear member is rotated. A game machine C3 characterized by being formed so as to be switchable between the immersive state and the overhanging state by switching a rotational speed to be caused.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the projecting member is in contact with the driven gear member by making the rotational speed of the main gear member different, and the projecting member is against the driven gear member. It is possible to switch between an immersive state in which the vehicle is idle.

  Thus, the control of the operating speed of the drive source and the state of the projecting member can be interlocked, so, for example, as compared with the case where the projecting member is extended by a solenoid, interlocking of the main operating gear member and the driven gear member Control can be simplified.

  In addition, as a member which produces an urging | biasing force, elastic springs, such as a coil spring and a torsion spring, the member etc. which consist of an elastic material with sufficient elasticity are illustrated.

  Also, a plurality of projecting members may be disposed on the main driving gear member out of phase. In this case, the amount of protrusion of each projecting member can be adjusted by adjusting the weight of each projecting member and the biasing force acting on each projecting member.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the projecting member includes a first projecting member and a second projecting member formed out of phase with the first projecting member, and the first projecting member and the second projecting member The amount by which the main driving gear member projects by the rotation of the main driving gear member is substantially equal, and the main driving gear member has a first rotational speed at which the first protruding member and the second protruding member form the recessed state, and The first rotating member and the second protruding member can form the second rotation speed at which the projecting state is formed, and the rotation speed of the main moving gear member is set to the first rotation speed and the second rotation speed. A game machine C4 characterized by being switchable in the middle of the rotation of the drive gear member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the phase at which the first projecting member starts to abut against the driven gear member by changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member during rotation; The main driving gear member can be brought into contact with the driven gear member in at least two types of phases with which the two projecting members begin to abut against the driven gear member.

  That is, the main driving gear member is rotated at the first rotation speed, and the rotation speed of the main driving gear member is changed to the second rotation speed immediately before the first projecting member is positioned on the driven gear member side. The engagement with the driven gear member can be started by the projecting member. Also, on the other hand, while rotating the main driving gear member at the first rotation speed, changing the rotation speed of the main driving gear member to the second rotation speed immediately before the second projecting member is positioned on the driven gear member side. Thus, the second projecting member can start meshing with the driven gear member.

  In other words, by arbitrarily selecting the timing at which the rotational speed of the main driving gear member is increased, the timing of extension and retraction of the projecting member can be arbitrarily selected. That is, even when the moving speed of the first moving member at the start of movement is the same, the timing to move the second moving member can be changed according to the timing to increase the moving speed of the first moving member. As a result, it is difficult to predict the subsequent effect only by confirming the speed at the start of the movement of the first moving member, and the attention of the operations of the first moving member and the second moving member can be improved. . Therefore, the rendering effects of the first moving member and the second moving member can be improved.

  In the case where the first and second projecting members project with substantially the same amount of overhang, the mass of the first and second projecting members are made equal and act on each other. When the forces are equal, or because the mass of the first projecting member and the mass of the second projecting member are different, the radially outward force generated by the rotation of the main driving gear member is different, but each projection is in a mode that eliminates the difference. The case where the biasing force applied to the member is changed is exemplified. For example, when the biasing force is generated by the elastic spring, it is exemplified to change the spring constant of the elastic spring which applies the biasing force to the first projecting member and the elastic spring which applies the biasing force to the second projecting member.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the projecting member is formed out of phase with the first projecting member and the first projecting member, and the first projecting member is attached to the driven gear member while the main movement gear member is rotating. And a second projecting member which comes close to the driven gear member after being approached, and the first projecting member and the second projecting member are formed to differ in the amount of overhang which is projected by the rotation of the main operating gear member. The main driving gear member is a part of the projecting member, the first projecting member forms an inserting state and the second projecting member forms a projecting state, and the first projecting member and the first projecting member A game machine C5 characterized in that both of the second projecting members can form a common rotation speed at which the overhanging state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2 or C3, a state in which the first projecting member abuts on the driven gear member without changing the rotational speed of the driving gear member during rotation; A state in which the projecting member abuts on the driven gear member can be formed.

  That is, by rotating the main driving gear member at a constant speed at the separation rotational speed, the main driving gear member is engaged with the driven gear member by the second projecting member. On the other hand, when the main driving gear member is rotated at the common rotation speed, the main driving gear member is engaged with the driven gear member by the first projecting member.

  That is, in order to change the position of the first moving member when the second moving member starts moving, there is no need to change the rotational speed of the drive source during the rotation of the main driving gear member. Can be

<Feature D group> (informing that it was possible to win a prize by detour)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a benefit giving means for providing a benefit to a player based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and a game ball applied to the ball entering means Variable means that can be changed to an open position where the ball can enter the ball and a restricted position for restricting the ball entry of the game ball, and the variable means from the restricted position to the open position based on the establishment of a specific condition Specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which an opening operation that is varied until a predetermined condition is established is performed a plurality of times,
In the case where the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means, a ball-entering aid means that makes it easier for the game ball on the restricted position of the variable means to enter the ball entering means in the subsequent opening operation. And a game machine D1 characterized in that

  Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine provided with a symbol display device as one of the gaming machines. In this pachinko machine, the start condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the start opening, and the symbol of the symbol display device changes. If the stop symbol after the start of the fluctuation is a combination of predetermined symbols, it becomes a big hit, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, and a large number of award balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special game state, the special winning opening of the variable winning device is opened after being opened for a predetermined time (or a predetermined number of times) and closed, and the opening and closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16) Times) are repeated. A large amount of prize balls can be paid out by causing the game balls to win in the large winning opening in the opened state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-700). However, when the opening and closing operation is repeatedly performed on such a gaming machine, the game ball which has reached the variable winning device can not enter the ball when the closing operation is performed, and the fired game ball is wasted. There is a problem that the player's interest is reduced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player by suppressing the game ball shot by the player from being wasted. It is intended to be provided.

  According to the gaming machine D1, even if the gaming ball has flowed down on the restricted position of the variable means, it is easy to enter the ball entering means at the next and subsequent open positions by the ball entry assisting means, so the ball enters the ball entering means There is an effect that the number of non-ball game balls can be suppressed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the ball entry assisting means has a guide path for guiding the game ball on the restricted position of the variable means to a position where the ball can be entered into the ball entry means. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the ball entry assisting means has a guiding path for guiding the game ball on the restricted position of the variable means to a position where the ball can be entered into the ball entry means Since the number of game balls entering the ball entering means can be increased, the present invention is effective.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the ball entry assisting means reduces the flow-down speed so that the ball can enter the ball within the ball entry range until the variable means is changed to the open position. A game machine D3 having a flow rate lowering means for causing the

  According to the gaming machine D3, in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the flow-down speed is reduced so that the gaming ball flows down a range where the ball can enter the ball entering means until the variable means is changed to the open position. Since the ball entry assisting means has means for lowering the speed of falling down, there is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the ball entering means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a first detection means for detecting a game ball which could not enter because the variable means is at the restricted position when the specific game is being executed; The second detection means capable of detecting the game ball when the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the ball insertion means by the ball-entry assisting means, and the game ball by the first detection means Having effect execution means for executing a first effect based on detection of the second effect, and performing a second effect different from the first effect when the game ball is detected by the second detection means A game machine D4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the specific game is being performed, the first detection means detects a game ball that can not be entered because the variable means is at the restricted position. When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means, the game ball is detected by the second detection means. The first effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first detecting means. Further, when the game ball is detected by the second detection means, a second effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect execution means. In this way, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the effect execution means executes whether or not the game ball that did not originally enter the ball enters the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means. Can be determined by Therefore, there is an effect that it can be recognized by the second effect that the player is advantageous.

  The gaming machine D4 has display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and the effect executing means comprises a first effect mode corresponding to the first effect and a second effect mode corresponding to the second effect. A game machine D5 characterized in that it can be displayed on at least the display means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, since the effect mode corresponding to each of the first effect and the second effect is displayed on the display means, the meaning indicated by the effect can be recognized intelligibly effective.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the second effect suggests that the game ball has entered the ball entering means by the ball entry assisting means, although the ball entering means is at the restricted position. A game machine D6 characterized in that it is configured to produce an effect.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, it is possible to recognize that the gaming ball that was on the restricted position by the second effect has entered the ball entry means by the ball entry assistance means. It has the effect of improving the interest of people with disabilities.

  In any one of the gaming machines D4 to D6, when the specific game is being executed, the counting means for counting the number of gaming balls detected by the second detection means, and the count value by the counting means A game machine D7 comprising: notification means for notifying a notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine D7, the number detected by the second detection means is notified by the notification means in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D4 to D6, so the number of gaming balls that has become advantageous to the player Has the effect of being able to determine

  The game machine according to any one of the game machines D4 to D7 has a judging means for judging whether the detected game ball has entered the ball entering means when the game ball is detected by the first detection means, The effect executing means is configured to execute a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect when it is determined by the determining means that the game ball has not entered the ball. Gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the third effect is that the gaming ball that could not enter the ball due to the restricted position could not finally enter the entering means. This has the effect that it can be recognized by the player and can give a clearer view to the game.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D8, at least the specific game type determination means for determining the type of the specific game to be executed by the specific game execution means, and the type of the specific game determined by the specific game type determination means A game machine D9, comprising: specific game storage means in which a plurality of the specific games different in execution interval of the opening operation are stored.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D8, a type having a different execution interval of the opening operation is set as the type of the specific game, so the ball entry assistance means There is an effect that it can be varied according to the type of specific game.

  In the specific game stored in the specific game storage means in the gaming machine D10, the first specification is set such that the execution interval at which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means is large A game is characterized in that it includes a second specific game with a smaller execution interval in which the game ball is more easily entered into the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means than the first specific game. A gaming machine D11.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D10, there is an effect that the ease of being entered with the ball entry assisting means can be varied according to the type of the specific game.

  In the gaming machine D11, a gaming machine D12 characterized in that the first specified game and the second specified game are set so that the number of opening operations is different.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D11, it is possible to make a difference between the values of the first specific game and the second specific game, and it is possible to impart more vividness to the game .

<Feature E group> (jump up bonus winning control)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the privilege giving means for giving a benefit advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the ball entering means Opening means for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position based on the establishment of a specific condition, and variable means capable of changing between the open position where the ball can enter and the restricted position for restricting the ball entry of the game ball It is determined by the specific game type determination means that determines the type of the specific game to be executed by the specific game execution means that executes the specific game in which the operation is set a plurality of times, and the specific game type determination means that A game machine E1 having, as the specified game, at least storage means in which a plurality of specified games different in pattern of the opening operation are stored.

  Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine provided with a symbol display device as one of the gaming machines. In this pachinko machine, the start condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the start opening, and the symbol of the symbol display device changes. If the stop symbol after the start of the fluctuation is a combination of predetermined symbols, it becomes a big hit, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, and a large number of award balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special game state, the special winning opening of the variable winning device is opened after being opened for a predetermined time (or a predetermined number of times) and closed, and the opening and closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16) Times) are repeated. It is possible to pay out a large amount of prize balls by winning the gaming balls in the large winning opening in the opened state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-9-700). However, such a gaming machine On the other hand, there is a problem that the opening pattern of the variable winning device is constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting bored with a game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine E1, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the bonus giving means is provided with a benefit that is advantageous to the player. The ball entering means is varied by an open position where the game ball can enter the ball, a regulated position where the ball entry of the game ball is restricted, and variable means. Based on establishment of the specific condition, the specific game execution means executes a specific game in which an opening operation for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times. The type of the specific game to be executed by the specific game execution means is determined by the specific game type determination means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determination means, a plurality of specific games having different patterns of the opening operation are stored by the storage means. Thereby, it can suppress that a specific game becomes monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the specific game is being executed, ball entry assisting means which makes it easier for the gaming ball on the restricted position of the variable means to enter the ball entering means in the subsequent opening operation. A game machine E2 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, when the specific game is being executed, the gaming ball on the restricted position of the variable means enters the ball in the subsequent opening operation by the ball entry assisting means. Since it is easy to enter the ball, there is an effect that it can be more advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine E2, in the plurality of specified games stored in the storage means, the game ball enters the ball entering means by the ball entry assisting means when the variable means is varied to the open position. The first specific game including a large number of advantageous opening operation patterns that are one of the patterns of the opening operation that are likely to be made and the second specific game including a smaller number of advantageous opening operation patterns than the first specific game A game machine E3 characterized by at least being set.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E2, a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than that can be set, so that the game is clearly provided. Has the effect of

  In the gaming machine E3, after the first specific game executes the advantageous opening operation pattern a predetermined number of times, the variable means can change to the opening position for a longer period than the opening operation in the advantageous opening operation pattern The opening action to be performed is set at least once, and in the second specific game, the game ball is entered into the ball entry assisting means by the ball entry assisting means of the predetermined number of times A gaming machine E4 characterized in that it is constituted by the opening operation of the disadvantageous opening operation pattern where it becomes difficult.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E3, a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than that can be set, so that the game is clearly provided. Has the effect of

  In the gaming machine E4, a detection means capable of detecting the game ball entered into the ball entering means by the ball entry assisting means, and an effect of executing a specific effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means A game machine E5 having an execution means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the player is provided with the specific effect being executed based on detection of the gaming ball having entered the ball entering means by the ball entry assisting means. In this way, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that it is in an advantageous state.

  In the first special game in the gaming machine E5, after the predetermined number of the advantageous opening operation patterns, the interval between execution of another opening operation and the execution interval of the next opening operation is greater than A long long interval is set, and an ending period of the specific game equal to or longer than the long interval is set to the second specific game after the predetermined number of the disadvantageous opening operation patterns. A game machine E6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E5, the identification of the first specified game and the second specified game can be made difficult to identify up to the predetermined number of opening operation patterns, Has the effect of being able to expect whether it is the first specified game or the second specified game.

  In the game machine E6, the ball entering effect execution means for executing an effect based on the detection result of the game ball by the detection means during the first specified game or the second specified game in the long interval and the end period. A game machine E7 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is possible to identify whether it is the first specified game or the second specified game by the effect executed in the long interval and the end period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the specific game becomes monotonous.

<Feature F group> (SW pressed table switching)
An effect is executed when an operation accepting means for accepting an operation by a player, a period setting means for setting an effective period in which the operation accepting means can accept the operation, and an operation accepted by the operation accepting means The effect executing means to perform, the effect selecting means for selecting the effect to be executed by the effect executing means, the memory means storing the plurality of effects selected by the effect selecting means, and the memory means A specific effect is stored as one of the plurality of effects, and the specific effect includes probability variable means for changing the probability of being selected by the selection means within the effective period. The game machine F1 to be characterized.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, those that develop a game while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as "LCD") are the mainstream. What kind of effect is to be performed is determined, for example, at the timing when the ball kicked into the game area enters the starting opening. That is, at the timing when the ball enters the starting opening, it is determined what pattern the rendition will be performed for how many seconds and what the rendition result will be. Then, the effect pattern is instructed from the main control device controlling the game to the display control device controlling the display, and the effect display instructed by the display control device is performed. Since the effect pattern is an instruction of a series of effect display of the effect pattern, as a result, the effect pattern includes an instruction of the time required for effect display (Patent Document 1). This is because it is determined in advance how many seconds it takes for a series of effect displays. In recent years, a large number of player participation type pachinko machines have been developed. These require button operation during a predetermined effect period, and develop different effects depending on the timing of the button operation. For example, the symbol display is displayed in a variable manner in a part of the effect display, the variable display is stopped in response to the button operation, and the effect display is performed so as to generate a so-called jackpot according to the stop result ( For example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2000-350846). However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game by performing various other various effects by button operation. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the operation by the player is accepted by the operation accepting means. The effective period in which the operation can be accepted by the operation accepting means is set by the period setting means. When the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The effect executed by the effect executing means is selected by the effect selecting means. The plurality of effects selected by the effect selecting means are stored by the storage means. In the storage means, a specific effect is stored as one of a plurality of effects, and the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selection means is varied by the probability variable means within the effective period. Thereby, when the player performs an operation, the probability that the specific effect is selected can be set to be different, so that the game can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, a plurality of effect groups configured by the plurality of effects different in selection rate of the specific effect are stored in the storage means, and the probability setting means stores the information stored in the storage means. A game machine characterized in that one of a plurality of effect groups is set, and the effect selecting means selects an effect from the effect groups set by the probability setting means. F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, by switching and setting the effect group, the probability setting means can change the selection rate of the specific effect by switching and setting the effect group Therefore, there is an effect that the selection probability of the specific effect can be easily varied.

  The gaming machine F2 has counting means for counting the number of times the operation has been received by the operation receiving means, and the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the count of the counting means. A game machine F3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F3, since the effect group is switched by the number of times the operation is accepted, there is an effect that the player can give a fresh taste to the game by performing the operation.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the effect group is switched by the probability setting means based on the remaining period set by the period setting means. Have the effect of being able to differ.

  In any one of the game machines F2 to F4, it has history storage means capable of storing the reception history when the operation is accepted by the operation acceptance means, and the probability setting means is stored in the history storage means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by switching and setting the effect group based on the reception history.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect that any one of the gaming machines F2 to F4 is played, the effect group is switched by the reception history, so that the probability can be varied according to the operation of the player.

<Feature G group> (Informing the SW effective period with the feature that the audio lamp controls)
A game comprising a first control means for executing control of a game, a second control means for executing control of a game based on a control signal from the first control means, and an operation unit operable by a player Machine, wherein the first control means receives the operation of the operation unit by the player, and that the second control means receives the operation based on the reception of the operation by the reception means. An acceptance transmission means for transmitting an acceptance signal to indicate, a period setting means for setting an effective period in which the operation of the player can be received by the acceptance means, and an effective signal indicating the effective period set by the period setting means Operation of the operation unit is set to be effective based on the valid signal transmitting unit capable of transmitting the second control unit and the valid period set by the period setting unit. Based on the start of the effective period set by the period setting means, the operation means capable of operating in at least the first state and the second state different from the second state, the notification means for notifying the notification mode to be shown, The operation control means operates the operation means from the first state to the second state, and the second control means displays the effect mode on the display means capable of displaying the effect mode and the display means And display control means for causing the display means to display a predetermined effect mode on the basis of the reception signal received from the reception transmission means, the effective signal transmission means A game machine G1, which causes the display means to display an effect mode indicating the effective period based on the effective signal transmitted from the device.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, those that develop a game while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as "LCD") are the mainstream. What kind of effect is to be performed is determined, for example, at the timing when the ball kicked into the game area enters the starting opening. That is, at the timing when the ball enters the starting opening, it is determined what pattern the rendition will be performed for how many seconds and what the rendition result will be. Then, the effect pattern is instructed from the main control device controlling the game to the display control device controlling the display, and the effect display instructed by the display control device is performed. Since the effect pattern is an instruction of a series of effect display of the effect pattern, as a result, the effect pattern includes an instruction of the time required for effect display (Patent Document 1). Here, there has been proposed a gaming machine which has a button operable by the player on the gaming machine and causes the liquid crystal display device to display a notice effect such as a character by operating the player. In such a gaming machine, there is a game machine in which the player can display an effective period in which a notice effect or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like when the operation means is operated (e.g. Open 2000-350846). However, when the display control device or the like that controls the display device does not determine the input of the operation means or manage the effective period, the displayed effective period deviates from the actual effective period, and the player's There was a problem of reducing interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the control of the game is controlled by the first control means. The control of the game is executed by the second control means based on the control signal from the first control means. In the first control means, the operation of the operation unit by the player is accepted by the acceptance means. Based on the reception of the operation by the reception means, the reception and transmission means transmits a reception signal indicating that the second control means has received the operation. The period setting means sets an effective period in which the player's operation can be received by the reception means. The valid signal indicating the valid period set by the period setting means is transmitted to the second control means by the valid signal transmission means. Based on the fact that the effective period set by the period setting means has come, the notification means indicates that a notification mode indicates that the operation of the operation unit has been effectively set. Actuation means are operated to at least a first state and a second state different from the second state. The actuation means is actuated by the actuation control means from the first state to the second state based on the start of the effective period set by the period setting means. In the second control means, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. The display mode is displayed on the display means by the display control means. The display control means displays the predetermined effect mode on the display means by the display control means based on the reception of the reception signal from the reception and transmission means. Based on the valid signal transmitted from the valid signal transmission unit, the effect mode indicating the valid period is displayed on the display unit. Thereby, the operating means operates to the second state even when there is a gap between the notification mode for notifying the effective period operated by the second control means and the effect mode indicating the effective period controlled by the second control means The valid period can be identified by the timing at which it is performed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the effective period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine G1 has main control means capable of outputting a control signal for controlling a game to the first control means, and the main control means executes a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The lottery means, the dynamic display period determination means for deciding the dynamic display period for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the establishment of the start condition. An output unit capable of outputting a start signal for starting dynamic display in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit to the control unit; A game machine characterized in that the period setting means of the first control means sets the effective period within the determined dynamic display period based on the reception of the start signal. G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, since the effective period is set within the dynamic display period based on the start signal received by the main control means for controlling the first control means in addition to the effects exhibited by the game machine G1, the more accurate There is an effect that the effective period can be set.

In the gaming machine G2,
A gaming machine G3 characterized in that the valid signal transmitting means transmits the valid signal to the second control means before dynamic display of the identification information is started.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, a valid signal is transmitted by the valid transmission means to the second control means before the dynamic display of identification information is started. There is an effect that the start of can be determined.

  A gaming machine G4 according to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, wherein the operating means is operated to a specific state different from the second state before the start of the effective period.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the actuating means is activated to a specific state before the start of the effective period, so that the effective period starts in advance Has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine G4, the operating means is provided such that an operating portion operating on the front side overlapping the display area of the display means is disposed, and the display control means of the second control means is in the effective period. A game machine G5 which causes the display means to display a specific effect aspect within a period overlapping with a period in which the operation means is operated to the specific state before the start of the game.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the notification of the effective period in the display means and the notification in the actuation means are easily recognized by arranging the operation means and the display means close to each other. It has the effect of being able to

  In the game machine G5, the specific effect mode is an effect in which specific symbol information is variably displayed from a display area overlapping with the operation portion of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, since the specific effect is variably displayed from the display area overlapping with the operating portion, the operating portion and the specific effect are interlocked. The effect is that the player can be made aware of the

<Feature H group> (Interlocking pseudo run and background level)
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of lottery conditions, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time determination means for determining a dynamic display time of the identification information to be dynamically displayed, and a lottery result by the lottery means within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means A plurality of expected degree advance notice display modes in which the effect mode is variably set according to the degree of expectation indicating that it is a specific lottery result, and a total expected degree forecast showing comprehensive expected degrees in the plurality of expected advance notice display modes Gaming machine H1, characterized in that those having a predictive display control means for displaying at least said display means and a display mode.

  Here, there is a gaming machine provided with a display screen such as an LCD. When a display screen is provided on a pachinko machine which is an example of the gaming machine, a plurality of symbols may be variably displayed on the display screen based on the establishment of the start condition. In such a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of the start condition, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a plurality of symbols variably displayed are combined in a predetermined combination (for example, 777, etc.) In many cases, a game in which a special game state (for example, a game state called a hit, etc.) is generated by stopping by a combination of numbers and then stopping is often performed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-072569) . In such a gaming machine, an expected degree of winning is notified by displaying a character or the like on a display screen. In the gaming machine illustrated above, when a plurality of notice displays etc. indicating the degree of expectation are displayed, it is difficult to understand the overall degree of expectation. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by being configured to execute an effect that is easy to understand.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. When the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. The dynamic display time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means, a plurality of expectation degree notices in which the effect mode is variably set according to the expectation degree indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result At least the display means displays the display mode and the general expectation degree advance notice display mode indicating the overall expectation in the plurality of expected advance notice display modes by the advance notice display control means. Thereby, since the overall expectation can be identified by the overall expectation notification display mode, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the expectation degree advance notice display mode displayed by the advance notice display control means is a general indication indicating an expectation degree higher than the expectation degree displayed in the general expectation degree advance notice mode. A game machine H2 characterized in that a variable notice display mode to be changed to an expectation degree notice display mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1, by displaying the expectation degree advance notice display mode, it is possible to increase the expectation degree displayed in the general expectation degree advance notice display mode, There is also an effect that the player can be interested in the expected degree preview display mode.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the determined dynamic display time. Expected degree notice for determining the type of the expected degree notice display mode displayed by the advance notice display control means based on the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means A game machine H3 characterized by including display mode determination means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, since the type of the expected degree notice display mode is determined based on the dynamic display mode, the degree of expectation associated with the dynamic display mode It is possible to notify the player and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player by not involving the contents of the dynamic display mode and the degree of expectation.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, after temporarily stopping the identification information in a predetermined manner, pseudo stop means for executing an effect of starting dynamic display at least once, and the number of temporary stops performed by the pseudo stop means Means for determining the number of times based on the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and the lottery result by the lottery means; A game machine H4, characterized in that the variable advance notice display mode is displayed on the display means based on execution of the temporary stop by means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2 or the gaming machine H3, it is possible to give a value to temporary stop, and to make the player expect to stop temporarily. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the total expectation degree advance notice display mode indicating a predetermined degree of expectation is determined by the expectation degree preliminary display mode determining means Game machine H5 characterized in that a specific dynamic display mode set to be set is set.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or the gaming machine H4, since the dynamic display mode is set in association with the general expectation degree advance notice display mode, the general display associated with the dynamic display mode The degree of expectation can be notified to the player, and the sense of discomfort given to the player can be alleviated by the fact that the contents of the dynamic display mode and the overall expectation do not accompany.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the advance notice display control means displays the total expectation degree advance notice display mode displayed within the dynamic display time of 1 when the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine H6 characterized by continuously displaying the comprehensive expectation degree advance notice display mode showing the same expectation degree also in the dynamic display of information.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the overall expectation is inherited over a plurality of dynamic displays, so that there is an effect that it is possible to have fun accumulating games. .

In any one of the gaming machines H3 to H6, a storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display mode groups configured with a plurality of different dynamic display modes are stored as the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means And setting means for setting the dynamic display mode group in which the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode.
The total expected degree advance notice display mode displayed within the dynamic display time of 1 is displayed as a display mode indicating the dynamic display mode group set by the setting means after the dynamic display time. A game machine H7 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H3 to H6, the dynamic display mode group set by the overall expectation can also be notified, so that various effects can be given to the player. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine H7, when the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display means, the setting means sets the effect mode group corresponding to the type of the comprehensive expectation degree advance notice mode displayed. A game machine H8 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the presentation mode group matched to the overall expectation is set, so that it is possible to give a relation between the overall expectation and the presentation mode group. The effect is that the notification can be carried out in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. The game machine Z1 to do. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine With gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A game machine Z3 characterized in that it is a fusion. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
There is a gaming machine provided with a display screen such as an LCD. When a display screen is provided on a pachinko machine which is an example of the gaming machine, a plurality of symbols may be variably displayed on the display screen based on the establishment of the start condition. In such a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of the start condition, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a plurality of symbols variably displayed are combined in a predetermined combination (for example, 777, etc.) In many cases, a game in which a special game state (for example, a game state called a hit, etc.) is generated after being stopped by a combination in which numbers are arranged). In such a gaming machine, an expected degree of winning is notified by displaying a character or the like on a display screen (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-072569).
However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming.
The present technical idea is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes the control of the game based on the first control means for executing the control of the game and the control signal from the first control means. Means and an operation unit operable by the player, and the first control means is based on the reception means for receiving the operation of the operation unit by the player and the fact that the operation is received by the reception means Reception transmitting means for transmitting a reception signal indicating that the operation has been received to the second control means, and period setting means for setting an effective period in which the player's operation can be received by the reception means; Based on the valid signal transmitting means capable of transmitting the valid signal indicating the valid period set by the period setting means to the second control means, and based on the valid period set by the period setting means, The notification means for notifying a notification mode indicating that the operation of the operation unit has been effectively set, the operation means operable in at least the first state and the second state different from the second state, and the period setting Operation control means for operating the operation means from the first state to the second state based on the start of the effective period set by the means, the second control means being capable of displaying the effect mode The display means includes display means and display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode, and the display control means displays the predetermined effect mode based on receipt of the acceptance signal from the acceptance transmission means. It is displayed on the means, and the effect mode indicating the effective period is displayed on the display means based on the effective signal transmitted from the effective signal transmitting means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, further comprising main control means capable of outputting a control signal for controlling a game to the first control means, the main control means A dynamic display period for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying on the display means the lottery means for executing the lottery and the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition The dynamic display of the identification information is started in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit to the first control unit based on the determination unit and the establishment of the start condition. The period setting means of the first control means, based on the reception of the start signal, the effective period within the determined dynamic display period It is what sets the period .
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. When the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. The dynamic display time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means, a plurality of expectation degree notices in which the effect mode is variably set according to the expectation degree indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result At least the display means displays the display mode and the general expectation degree advance notice display mode indicating the overall expectation in the plurality of expected advance notice display modes by the advance notice display control means.
As a result, since the overall expectation can be identified by the overall expectation notification display mode, the player can play the game easily. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2 described in technical idea 1, according to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, an expected degree advance notice display mode is displayed This makes it possible to increase the degree of expectation displayed in the general expectation degree advance notice display mode, so that the player can have an interest in the expectation degree advance notice display mode.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device ( display means )
113 Audio lamp control unit 114 Display control unit
203a special symbol holding ball storage area (storage means)
S303, S304 lottery means
S307, S308 dynamic display period determination means
S1313 fluctuation display setting processing
S1403 Background change lottery process (part of notice display control means)
S406 acquisition means
S407 look-ahead processing (pre-lottery means)

Claims (2)

Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions;
Storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on the information stored in the storage means ;
Display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
Prior lottery means capable of executing a prior lottery on the information stored in the storage means before the lottery means is executed;
A gaming machine comprising: bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result.
And dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of said identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic table 示手 stage,
Its dynamic display period determination unit dynamically display period determined by a plurality of expected representation embodiment is variably to set the expectations indicating that the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific lottery result a degree predictive display mode state, and are not, and a warning display control means for displaying at least said display means and overall degree of expectation predictive display mode showing the overall expectations in that a plurality of expected predictive display mode,
The notice display control means is
When the information stored in the storage means is determined to be information determined to be the result corresponding to the specific lottery result, the information before the information is stored. During the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the overall expectation for the comprehensive expectation notice is displayed Display variable only in the direction of rising,
When the information determined that the result of the prior lottery corresponds to the specific lottery result is not stored in the information stored in the storage means, the total expectation degree advance notice It is possible to variably display the total expectation degree advance notice display mode into a mode in which the overall expectation degree becomes high or a state in which the overall expectation degree becomes low based on the overall expectation degree indicated by the display mode. Game machine characterized by The display means, a game machine according to claim 1, wherein the der Rukoto what is a liquid crystal display.

Images